• Skip to primary navigation
  • Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar

Fantabulosity logo

  • All Recipes
  • Vintage Recipes
  • Holiday
  • Dinner Theme System
  • About
  • Navigation Menu: Social Icons

    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Recipes
  • Desserts
  • Dinners
  • Gatherings
  • Holidays
  • About Jessica
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Recipes
    • Desserts
    • Dinners
    • Gatherings
    • Holidays
    • About Jessica
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Taco Party and Taco Bar Ideas

    Taco Party and Taco Bar Ideas

    March 25, 2025

    Taco bar on table with salsa, chicken, and toppings in bowls.

    Taco Party and Taco Bar Ideas: A great and easy way to feed your guests for any event! Get the free printable list of taco bar items below!

    Hi! My name is Bethany from Southern Couture and I’m so glad to be here on Fantabulosity today! It is my pleasure to throw this fiesta for you! 

    These simple taco bar party ideas are not just for Cinco de Mayo but a perfect food bar idea for any family game night, birthday parties or a fun in-home dinner to change things up a bit.

    Plus, if you have a lot of leftover taco meat… that’s not such a bad thing. There’s a great list of ways to use leftover taco meat if you make too much!

    Combine a Taco Bar with a Nacho Bar Party as Jessica styled below, and you’ll be the hit of the town with your guests:

    See the Nacho Bar Party HERE!

    Nacho Bar Party Ideas

    Taco Bar Topping Ideas

    Note from Jessica: “I’ve actually created a free printable that you can print off, in case it would be easier for you to take it with you to the store while you’re shopping for ingredients! You can download the Taco Bar Topping Ideas list or you can just check out the list of topping ideas below!”

    Taco Bar Topping Ideas Printable Download

    Here’s the list in case you would rather copy & paste them into your grocery shopping list! 🙂

    But First, Tacos!

    UPDATE: I found “But First, Tacos!” balloons while browsing online and I HAD to share them with you in case you want to spiff up your taco bar with these…

    Standard Toppings for your Taco Bar:

    • Meat of choice (ground beef, chicken for chicken street tacos, fish, shrimp, crock-pot pulled pork)
    • Tortilla shells (Soft or Hard) – or even something like these fried tacos!
    • Taco Salad Bowls
    • Cheese, shredded
    • Lettuce, shredded
    • Tomatoes or Pico (get the best pico de gallo recipe!)
    • Black Olives
    • White or Green Onions
    • Jalapenos
    • Refried Beans
    • Mexican Rice
    • Salsa
    • Taco Sauce
    • Guacamole (easy and our favorite guacamole recipe!)
    • Avocados
    • Sour cream
    • Limes, sliced
    • Cilantro
    • Tortilla Chips

    Fun – Out of the Box Taco Topping Ideas:

    • Romaine lettuce for wraps
    • Ranch Dressing
    • Black Beans
    • Chili Beans
    • Pinto Beans
    • Cole Slaw Mix
    • Roasted Corn
    • Nacho Cheese
    • Cilantro Lime Rice
    • Feta Cheese
    • Blue Cheese Crumbles
    • Hot Sauce
    • Red/Green Peppers
    • Tofu
    • Bacon
    • Barbecue Sauce
    • Pineapple
    • Serve a hot taco dip to go along with the tacos!

    Taco Bar Decorating and Styling Ideas

    I usually just start with an empty table and start building from there with a tablecloth or no tablecloth depending on how I feel. For this party, I decided on no tablecloth and to keep it simple. With the temps warming up, I moved it outdoors on our back porch for a little more fun.

    Simple Taco Bar Set-Up

    Simple Taco Bar Party Ideas

    Move It & Label It

    I start placing all of my ingredients into different serving dishes and then place them on the table moving things around until I'm happy with the results.

    To label each item (even though we know what everything is, it's just more fun), you could also place chalkboard stickers on the table beside each dish and then write with a chalk marker what each one is.

    Simple Taco Bar Party Ideas
    Simple Taco Bar Party Ideas

    Different Heights:

    Be sure to add different heights on your table as well for not only looks but also to make it easier when guests are trying to reach for all the deliciousness. 

    Simple Taco Bar Party Ideas

    Pops of Color:

    To really add a pop of color, try making sombrero decorations made from terra cotta pots and pom-poms or even some tissue paper banners that are perfect for a fiesta.

    You can find them on my blog where I shared my Cinco de Mayo Party: Decorations and Recipes. I hung some of the tissue paper banners around the table for some extra color.

    Simple Taco Bar Party Ideas

    Premade = Easy

    And if that isn't enough goodness, the great news about a taco bar is that you can usually just buy everything you already need premade to make your life so much simpler and just place it in serving trays if you are pressed for time. You could even make this walking taco casserole to add to the table so they can scoop a big helping in to their plates!

    Simple Taco Bar Party Ideas

    A Couple “Must-Know” Taco Recipes

    If you’re looking for something else that’s easy to serve next to a taco bar, we love these easy crock pot enchiladas!

    Salsa Recipe:

    For my salsa, I love a good, easy, homemade salsa recipe.

    Guacamole Recipe:

    I recommend Jessica’s best guacamole recipe. It is delicious and so easy to make. I highly recommend it!

    guacamole recipe

    3 Bean Salad – Mexican Style

    Serve on the side, or serve on the taco bar so guests can pile this Mexican 3 Bean Salad on as a topping!

    3 bean salad recipe - cilantro lime, black beans, dark red kidney beans, pinto

    Then just for fun…

    If you’re hosting friends, I think it would be super fun to wear this shirt that I found.

    Thanks so much for having me over for this fiesta and I hope you enjoy your Cinco de Mayo! Be sure to eat an extra taco for me too.

    Want More Party Ideas?

    Then you won’t want to miss my favorite party posts, especially my easy party appetizers post where I share my favorites!

    • I can SO do this!!! Coffee Bar Party: "You've Warmed My Heart," theme! LOVE what she did as a random act of kindness with her guests! DIY Coffee bar ideas galore, and SO easy! fantabulosity.com
      Coffee Bar Ideas for a Party (What to Serve + Easy Setup Guide)
    • nacho bar ideas
      Nacho Bar Ideas
    • Ice Cream Party Ideas: Pastel Colors, ice cream cookies, cones with sprinkles,
      Ice Cream Party Ideas (Simple Decorations, Treats & Birthday Ideas)
    • Burger Bar Ideas for an outdoor party
      Burger Bar Ideas for Your Next Party

    Originally published: April 2016

    Updated photso and republished: March 2025

    The BEST Fried Shrimp

    March 25, 2025

    fried shrimp on plate next to sauce

    Fried Shrimp is so much easier to make at home than you think. Just a few, simple pantry ingredients to create this fried shrimp batter using flour and cornmeal to make it crispy, and now you’ll know how to make pan-fried shrimp for easy dinners and it will become a true favorite!

    Pan fried shrimp on a plate with sauce

    Roll up your sleeves, break out your pans and get to dredging. You’re less than 30 minutes away from crispy shrimp and old bay cocktail sauce or the dipping sauce recipe I share below, at home tonight or on “Fried Friday” in your Dinner Theme System.

    Serving tip: Serve this with steak! Not sure how to make steak? Here’s my favorite restaurant-quality steak recipe to use, How to Cook Steak or keep frying and make this deer meat recipe if you have venison in the freezer.

    Hey there! Meg here and I'm so excited to share another recipe with you all! I know how much you loved this grilled shrimp so this will be another seafood recipe to add to your cookbook!

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    I don't know about you but sometimes I find making fried foods at home kind of intimidating unless it’s air fryer shrimp.

    • Easy Breading: When frying, there's the whole dredging process and the sometimes messy, (tip below on how to make very little mess) frying of the food in hot oil. But I'm here to tell you, you will LOVE how easy this recipe is and it’s way better than the store-bought, frozen breaded shrimp, that’s for sure!
    • Restaurant quality fried shrimp at home in less than 20 minutes.
    • Batter Secret: Plus, using cornmeal and flour together in the batter, creates a crispy shrimp that’s hard not to love!
    Fried shrimp on plate next to dipping sauce.

    Fried Shrimp Cornmeal and Flour Batter

    The mixture of flour and cornmeal adds such a delicious crust to the shrimp. The cornmeal adds a crazy crunch and the flour adds its own wonderful touch for the crispiest fried shrimp!

    A good amount of onion powder, garlic powder, kosher salt, and a nice sprinkle of cayenne pepper in the batter also bring lots of flavor and interest.

    Fried Shrimp Recipe Ingredients

    The ingredient list for this fried shrimp recipe is small and basic but it packs a punch! You’ll find that ingredients are similar to other fried recipes on the blog, so if you have pork chops handy, you’ll also love this fried pork chops recipe!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Fried Shrimp Ingredients on table

    Shrimp + Oil

    • Canola oil for frying (or vegetable oil)
    • 24 ounces large raw shrimp, peeled and deveined

    Egg Wash

    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 cup buttermilk (or milk)
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper

    Batter and Shrimp Seasoning Ingredients

    Keeping the seasoning simple is key for a crispy coating! Just a few favorite spices really give this shrimp, tons of flavor! You’ll be using these spices to mix with the flour and cornmeal!

    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 cup cornmeal
    • 2 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
    • 2 teaspoons onion powder
    • 1 teaspoon cayenne pepper

    Optional Dipping Sauce:

    This sauce recipe is optional but highly recommended.

    • ¾ cup mayo
    • ½ cup sweet chili sauce

    Similar to this sauce, this boom boom shrimp is coated in a delicious tangy sauce!

    Step by Step Directions:

    Before beginning: Heat oil in a large, heavy-bottomed skillet over medium heat. Line a large plate with a paper towel, set aside.

    Steps 1-4 of how to make fried shrimp.
    1. In a cake pan, pie plate, shallow dish or shallow bowl, whisk together eggs and buttermilk. Add ½ teaspoon of salt and pepper.  (Image below.)
    2. In another cake pan, mix together the flour, cornmeal, salt, pepper, garlic powder, onion powder, and cayenne pepper. 
    3. Add shrimp to the egg mixture and coat shrimp well.
    4. A few at a time, add the shrimp to the flour/cornmeal mixture and coat completely. (Place on a clean plate while you bread the remaining shrimp.)

    TIP: Allowing the shrimp to rest while breading the other shrimp, will help prevent the breading from falling off during frying.

    Steps 5-8 on how to make fried shrimp.
    1. Add shrimp to skillet in a single layer, making sure not to overcrowd the pan. Let shrimp cook and fry for 3 minutes, until crispy and to a golden brown perfection.
    2. Remove shrimp from oil with a slotted spoon and drain on a prepared plate that has layers of paper towels to soak up any excess oil. Continue until all shrimp is fried. 

    Dipping Sauce Recipe for Shrimp

    Mayo and sweet chili sauce mix up to a creamy, spicy, slightly sweet sauce that really compliments the crispy, tender fried shrimp.

    1. Place the mayo and sweet chili sauce in a separate small bowl.
    2. Mix together the ingredients until evenly combined and serve with the cooked fried shrimp.
    Pan fried shrimp on a plate with sauce

    Recipe Pro Tips

    The Key to Less Mess: Ideally, set up two pie plates to create a breading station. You can use bowls if necessary but the wide, shallow shape of pie or cake pans makes the process much easier. One cake pan will have the liquid ingredients, in this case, an egg and buttermilk. The second pan will hold the dry ingredients, flour, cornmeal, and spices for a major flavor punch.

    Tips for How to Batter Shrimp

    This is by far the best shrimp batter, and after so many others have made this too and left reviews saying they think it’s delicious too… it’s safe to say it’s an easy recipe that you’ll want to cook shrimp in from here on out!

    Use one hand (I usually use my left since I move through the process left to right) to coat the shrimp in the egg mixture. Pick up the shrimp with the wet hand and place it in the dry mixture. Now use your other hand to gently coat the shrimp.

    Because you aren't going back and forth with both hands they aren't getting goopy and gross. One hand will have egg and one hand flour but not a big lumpy mess.

    It's not anything revolutionary but it makes a big difference in the mess level of battering and frying.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long do you fry shrimp for?

    Once battered, it only takes 3 minutes to fry the shrimp in oil.

    Do you have to soak shrimp in milk before frying?

    You can soak it but it’s not required. However, dipping shrimp in to milk (or buttermilk) instead of soaking, before frying is recommended. The buttermilk helps the batter stick to the shrimp and provides a thicker coating.

    How do you get breading to stick to shrimp?

    A buttermilk and egg will help the flour and cornmeal batter stick to the fried shrimp.

    How to fry shrimp

    Fried Shrimp Sauces

    If you don’t want to make the sauce recipe above, here are some other dipping options for your shrimp that you will love:

    • honey mustard
    • cocktail sauce
    • spicy ketchup
    • country white gravy
    • tartar sauce
    • hot sauce
    • remoulade sauce
    • ranch or even this jalapeno ranch

    Side Dishes to Serve with Southern Fried Shrimp

    Serve this southern shrimp recipe (or so we think it’s “southern”) with Amish potato salad or a side salad to round out your meal and enjoy. P.S. That side salad will give you LIFE.

    Or, serve popular side dishes such as:

    • fried mushrooms
    • hush puppies
    • since you’re frying shrimp, might as well make these fried pickles too!
    • seasoned potato wedges
    • french fries (or polenta fries or eggplant fries for healthier options)
    • roasted brussels sprouts
    • Instant Pot corn on the cob

    Or, if you want to serve it alone, you can easily add lemon wedges to the side and even a little chopped fresh parsley if you like!

    Easy Fried Shrimp Recipe and batter how-to!

    How to Store Leftover Shrimp

    To store any leftover shrimp, store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    How to Reheat Fried Shrimp

    When ready to reheat the fried shrimp, using the air fryer works amazingly well! Or, you can bake it in the oven or a toaster oven (around 400 degrees for a few minutes until heated through) to crisp it up a little.

    Using a microwave can leave the fried shrimp soggy but it’s definitely a way you can reheat if preferred.

    Classic, crispy fried shrimp is so much easier to make at home than you think. Just a few, simple pantry ingredients and you're on your way to fried perfection.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    Want more yummy recipes? You’ll also love this shrimp baked potato, grilled shrimp marinade recipe. Or, if you love fried recipes, this southern country fried steak is a great southern staple.

    This fried rice recipe is perfect to create a fried shrimp rice recipe.
    Or serve up this fried shrimp recipe as an appetizer with some of our other favorite easy appetizer recipes that we have here on the blog.

    Originally published in 2019, then updated in November 2024 and in March 2025.

    Recipe

    fried shrimp on plate next to sauce
    Print Pin
    4.88 from 181 votes

    Fried Shrimp

    Classic, crispy fried shrimp is so much easier to make at home than you think. Just a few, simple pantry ingredients and you're on your way to fried perfection.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 6 minutes minutes
    Total Time 21 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 492kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • Canola oil for frying
    • 24 ounces large raw shrimp, peeled and deveined

    Egg Wash

    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 cup buttermilk (or milk)
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper

    Batter

    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 cup cornmeal
    • 2 teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 2 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 2 teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 teaspoon cayenne pepper

    Dipping Sauce:

    • ¾ cup mayo
    • ½ cup sweet chili sauce

    Instructions

    • Heat ½-inch of oil in a large, heavy-bottomed skillet over medium heat. Line a large plate with a paper towel, set aside.
    • In a cake pan or pie plate whisk together eggs and buttermilk. Add ½ teaspoon of salt and pepper. 
    • In another cake pan, mix together the flour, cornmeal, salt, pepper, garlic powder, onion powder, and cayenne pepper. 
    • Add shrimp to the egg mixture and coat well. A few at a time, add the shrimp to the flour and coat completely. Place on a clean plate while you bread the remaining shrimp. 
    • Add shrimp to skillet making sure not to overcrowd the pan. Fry for 3 minutes, until crispy and golden brown. Drain on prepared plate. Continue until all shrimp is fried. 

    Dipping Sauce

    • Mix mayo and sweet chili sauce in a bowl for dipping. 

    Notes

    Breading the shrimp with less mess:
    Set up your breading station using two pie plates. (Bowls can be used but the wide, shallow shape of pie or cake pans makes the process much easier.
    One cake pan will have the liquid ingredients and the second pan will hold the dry ingredients, flour, cornmeal, and spices.
    Use one hand to coat the shrimp in the egg mixture. Pick up the shrimp with the wet hand and place it in the flour mixture. Now use your other hand to gently coat the shrimp. Because you aren’t going back and forth with both hands they aren’t getting goopy and gross. One hand will have egg and one hand flour but not a big lumpy mess.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1g | Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 1217mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 460IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 2.9mg

    Easy Salisbury Steak Recipe with Mushroom Gravy (30-Minute Dinner)

    March 23, 2025

    Close up of a salisbury steak patty in a skillet, that's covered with mushroom gravy.

    Salisbury steak is a classic, easy ground beef dinner made with seasoned patties and rich mushroom gravy. This version comes together in about 30 minutes and is perfect for a cozy, old-fashioned meal at home.

    Close up of cooked salisbury steak with mushroom gravy, and fresh parsley, all in a skillet.

    This classic dish will take you back to your childhood! I’m sure all of us have had this many times, whether or not we enjoyed it as kids. This is the perfect weeknight meal as we use gravy packets to jump-start our dish with lots of flavor!

    If you love steak as much as I do, you can also easily make slow cooker London Broil or use affordable cube steaks. Another really tender and flavorful option is to make the best steak bites ever!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
    • Make-ahead recipe: Did you know that you can make this recipe in advance if you want to? It’s true, see my tips below on how to do that!
    • Ready in only 30 minutes: Talk about a quick and easy dinner idea! This recipe, from start to finish, only takes half an hour.

    Ingredients Needed

    Here’s what you’ll need to make this Salisbury steak recipe:

    Labeled ingredients of images for salisbury steak sitting on counter.
    • Ground beef – Use a lean beef so the dish isn’t too fatty.
    • Mushrooms – White or baby bella are both delicious here. You can even use a mix of the two types, add extra, or even keep them out! Maybe try some sautéed onions as well.
    • Bread crumbs – Regular, unseasoned bread crumbs as we are adding our own seasoning.
    • Seasoning – Italian seasoning gives us a great base, especially when mixed with ketchup and Worcestershire. Feel free to adjust the levels to your taste.
    • Gravy mix – Plain brown gravy envelopes are a great base for a cheater gravy!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    How to Make Salisbury Steak

    To make Salisbury steak, combine ground beef with seasonings, form into patties, and cook in a skillet before simmering in a rich mushroom gravy until tender.

    Process images for salisbury steak recipe, showing in an image collage.

    STEP 1. Mix patties. Use your hands to combine the patty ingredients, then form them into 4 equal “steaks.”

    Tip: Mixing with your hands might be messy, but it’s the easiest way to combine and then shape!

    STEP 2. Sear steaks. Sear both sides of the steaks, then set aside. It’s ok if they aren’t cooked through just yet.

    4 salisbury steaks in white skillet, surrounded by mushroom gravy.

    STEP 3. Make gravy. Add mushrooms to the pan and saute, then add remaining gravy ingredients and stir to combine.

    STEP 4. Simmer. Return the steaks to the pan and let everything simmer until thickened and the steak is cooked through.

    Cooked salisbury steak sitting on top of mashed potatoes, covered in mushroom gravy.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Mix with your hands. While messy, this is the best way to make sure everything is evenly combined without over-mixing. You’re going to have to shape with your hands anyway, so you may as well mix with them!
    • Extra liquid. The gravy packets normally call for 1 cup of water each. Since you simmer this for a bit, I find that using more than the 2 cups is perfect.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the difference between Salisbury steak and hamburger steak?

    The difference is that hamburger steak is usually prepared with basic seasonings like salt and pepper. Salisbury steak has a mixture of ingredients included in it such as eggs, bread crumbs, and additional seasonings.

    Can I leave out the mushrooms in Salisbury steak?

    Yes, if you aren’t a fan of them, feel free to leave them out of the gravy. You could also add sliced onions if you like those! Adjust everything to your taste!

    Can I double a Salisbury steak recipe?

    Definitely! You’ll need a large pot or a saucepan with taller sides. You will likely need to sear the steaks in batches though, to ensure they get great color. It’s fine for them to overlap some while simmering to finish cooking but to sear them they need room.

    What to Serve with Salisbury Steak

    Depending on what you grew up with, it seems that egg noodles or mashed potatoes are the true classic side dishes. You could also serve over rice if that’s more your jam. You can also roast up some green beans or broccoli or serve up some green peas.

    Storage

    Leftovers will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for a few days. Reheat on the stovetop.

    You can freeze the completely cooked and cooled meal for a future date! You can easily reheat on the stove, or pop in the crockpot on low for a couple hours.

    Looking for more meals like this? These old-fashioned comfort food dinners are family favorites.

    More Ground Beef Recipes You’ll Love

    • Close up photo of a white plate full of cooked egg noodles topped with meatballs in a creamy sauce
      Delicious Swedish Meatballs
    • french onion beef casserole scooped up out of white dish
      French Onion Beef Casserole
    • Hamburger hashbrown casserole in baking dish with ladle resting in it.
      Hamburger Hashbrown Casserole
    • Cheeseburger sub on white plate.
      Cheeseburger Subs

    Recipe originally published in March of 2024, then updated again in March of 2025.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up of a salisbury steak patty in a skillet, that's covered with mushroom gravy.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Easy Salisbury Steak Recipe with Mushroom Gravy

    Salisbury steak is made out of ground beef, bread crumbs and seasonings, covered in a brown gravy filled with mushrooms, rand eady in 30 minutes!
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 4
    Calories 427kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Steak patties:

    • 1 pound ground beef
    • ¼ cup bread crumbs
    • 1 egg beaten
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 2 teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning
    • 2 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper
    • 1 tablespoon cooking oil

    Gravy:

    • 1 tablespoon cooking oil
    • 8 ounces sliced mushrooms white or baby bella are recommended
    • 2 packets brown gravy mix such as McCormicks
    • 2 ¼ cups water
    • 2 tablespoons ketchup
    • 1 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
    • Salt and pepper to taste
    • Fresh minced parsley optional

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl, mix the ground beef, bread crumbs, beaten egg, garlic powder, onion powder, Italian seasoning, Worcestershire sauce, salt, and pepper until combined.
      1 pound ground beef, ¼ cup bread crumbs, 1 egg, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 2 teaspoon onion powder, 1 ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning, 2 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce, ¼ teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon pepper
    • Shape the mixture into 4 equal patties that are about 3⁄4 inch thick.
    • In a large skillet, heat the cooking oil to medium-high heat.
      1 tablespoon cooking oil
    • Place the patties in the oil and sear them for about 3 minutes. They should be browned and almost cooked through (but will finish cooking when we add them to the gravy later.)
    • Remove the patties from the skillet and set aside on a plate covered with aluminum foil. This will help to keep the patties warm while preparing the mushroom gravy.
    • In the same skillet add another tablespoon of cooking oil over medium heat. Add the sliced mushrooms to the pan.
      1 tablespoon cooking oil, 8 ounces sliced mushrooms
    • Sauté the sliced mushrooms for 5 – 6 minutes.
    • Add in the two packets of brown gravy mix and gradually stir in the water. Whisk until smooth and then add the ketchup and Worcestershire sauce.
      2 packets brown gravy mix, 2 ¼ cups water, 2 tablespoons ketchup, 1 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
    • Reduce heat to medium-low and add the patties back into the skillet with the gravy mixture. Simmer for about 7 - 10 minutes until the patties are cooked through. They should reach an internal temperature of 160 degrees F.
    • Check for seasoning and additional salt and pepper to taste. Garnish with parsley if desired.
      Salt and pepper, Fresh minced parsley
    • Serve the steaks with your favorite side dishes such as mashed potatoes, rice, or egg noodles.

    Notes

    • When mixing the patty mixture together, the best way to mix it is with your hands. It is the easiest way to get everything combined. This is messy, but the most efficient way to get everything properly mixed together.
    • This recipe can be prepared and frozen as a quick freezer meal for later. Cook completely and then cool. Add to a Ziploc freezer bag or freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. When ready to prepare, remove from the freezer and allow to thaw overnight. The dish can then be added to an oven-safe pan to reheat or to a crockpot until warm.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1steak | Calories: 427kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 118mg | Sodium: 1057mg | Potassium: 630mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 115IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 64mg | Iron: 4mg

    Texas Toast Pizzas

    March 22, 2025

    Texas Toast Pizza on baking sheet

    Texas Toast Pizzas: These mini pizzas are cooked on frozen garlic toast, making it so easy, with tons of flavor! Now, everyone can make their own pizza on pizza night and have fun with their favorite toppings!

    Like our bagel pizzas, these are perfect for lunch or even as an easy dinner idea, it’s a great recipe for a busy weeknight or just to keep things simple!

    Texas Toast Pizza on Baking Sheet

    Make this Texas toast garlic bread pizza for the kids when they’re having a sleepover or when you get home from a late practice! You may also want to make this French bread pizza for the kiddos too!

    Although we make pepperoni pizzas on Texas toast, feel free to add your favorite toppings! We’ll even give you some suggestions below if you want to experiment or even make a pizza food bar, making these a party favorite!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love These Garlic Toast Pizzas

    • Garlic Toast Crust – Instead of pizza crust or pizza dough, this recipe uses garlic bread (or Texas Toast) so you can keep these on hand in the freezer for last-minute meals! (If you have extra, consider making the frozen Texas toast in the air fryer!)
    • Favorite Toppings – With them being personal pizzas, you can use the toppings of your choice, or even make a variety of different types of pizzas!
    • Quick and Easy – like so many recipes here, this texas toast garlic bread pizza is ready in minutes!

    Ingredients

    Keeping it simple, this recipe uses minimal ingredients but they may soon become your favorite… maybe even better than Pizza Hut!

    Ingredients for texas toast pizzas on counter
    • Garlic Texas Toast, or Cheese Texas Toast: The frozen toast is a great option for a simple recipe but you can buy it in the deli or even make your own, especially using this Italian bread recipe! (See “substitutions” below, for more ideas.)
    • Pizza Sauce: Grab your favorite pizza sauce at one of your local grocery stores. Or you can even use tomato sauce, and flavor it with garlic powder, Italian seasoning, salt, and pepper.)
    • Shredded Mozzarella Cheese: Even though the garlic toast that we use, already has cheese on it, we think you can never have too much cheese!
    • Pepperoni: We used turkey pepperoni but you can use your favorite type of pepperoni or even mini pepperoni!
    • Fresh Parsley, if desired: Perfect for adding color.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    Substitutions and Variations

    So many things can be substituted for these mini pizzas made on Texas toast! Here are some of our suggestions:

    • Bread: Have fun using bread that may need to be used up! Sliced bread for toast, English muffins, or even leftover hamburger or hot dog buns. Spread butter on them, sprinkle a little garlic powder or garlic salt, and make as instructed! (Keeping in mind it may not take as long to cook if your bread isn’t frozen.)
    • Sauce: Pizza sauce, marinara sauce or you can make your own! Also feel free to try alfredo sauce for a fun spin!
    • Cheese: We used mozzarella but you can use your favorite shredded cheese! Pepperjack, Mexican blend, shredded cheddar, etc.
    • Seasonings: Garlic powder, basil, Italian seasoning, pepper, salt.

    How to Make Texas Toast Pizzas

    1. Preheat oven to 425 degrees.
    2. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    3. Place Texas toast on baking sheet, in single layer.
    4. Spread a little pizza sauce on each piece of bread. (Approximately a couple of Tablespoons of sauce on each piece, or more if you prefer more sauce!)
    cheese garlic bread on baking sheet
    Frozen Cheese Texas Toast
    Pizza sauce spooned on to texas toast
    Add pizza sauce
    1. Spread the sauce evenly on each piece.
    2. Sprinkle mozzarella cheese on top of pizza sauce. (As much as you’d like but we used about 2 cups – or an 8 ounce bag – of shredded mozzarella for the 8 pieces of garlic bread.)
    3. Place pepperoni on each piece of bread, or your favorite toppings. We used 3 pepperonis for each slice.
    Shredded mozzarella cheese on top of garlic cheese toast
    Add mozzarella
    Pepperonis added to texas toast
    Add pepperoni
    1. Place baking sheet in to the oven and bake for about 5 minutes.
      Optional: If you’d like to switch the oven to “broil” at the last minute to help the pizzas turn golden brown, you definitely can.
    baked texas toast pizza on baking sheet

    Feel free to enjoy these Texas toast pizzas right away, or spinkle fresh parsley on the top!

    Cooked Garlic Bread Pizza
    Hot and Ready!
    Texas Toast Pizza on Cookie Sheet with fresh parsley
    Sprinkle Parsley

    Favorite Pizza Toppings

    • Sausage: Ground sausage, Italian sausage
    • Bacon: Chopped cooked bacon is delicious on pizza
    • Ham: Chopped ham (thick chopped ham) adds great saltiness flavor.
    • Chicken: A great way to use leftover chicken!
    • Ground Beef: Cook your ground beef ahead of time, and sprinkle it on for added protein.
    • Vegetables: bell peppers, mushrooms, spinach
    • Fruit: Yes! Pineapple chunks are great on a pizza, preferably with a salty protein like ham.
    • Garnish: Crushed red pepper, grated parmesan cheese
    Hand holding Texas Toast Pizza

    Storage

    If you have leftover pizzas, store them in an airtight container with a lid, cover with plastic wrap or place in a plastic, ziptop bag.

    To reheat: You can place them back in the oven on a cookie sheet, warm in the microwave, or our favorite… reheat them in the air fryer to help them taste like they were just made!

    Top Tip

    Only make as many as you need, and keep the ingredients on hand for last-minute meals. The ingredients are all something that can either be frozen or stored in the pantry for quite a while.

    Texas Toast Pizza Recipe FAQs

    What makes bread Texas toast?

    Usually, Texas toast is just a thick variation of Italian bread.

    Can you cook Texas toast on the stovetop?

    You can… it just may not get the “oven-baked” texture but it’s worth a try! It’s recommended to place the Texas toast on the non-stick skillet, and cover it with a lid and cook over medium heat for a couple of minutes. (Since you cannot flip, the lid will help cook evenly.)

    How long do you cook frozen Texas Toast Pizzas?

    Certain brands can vary but typically you cook it for 4-5 minutes in the oven at 425°.

    More Easy Recipes

    If you love quick and easy meal ideas like these Texas Toast Pizzas, then you’ll also love this pizza monkey bread, this mozzarella wrap, and these Italian slider sandwiches.

    Or, if you’re looking for more of a cheesy recipe, that you can even serve as a side dish with these pizzas, this cheesy bread recipe is great for that!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    This post was originally published in October 2022, November 2024, and March 2025.

    Recipe

    Texas Toast Pizza on baking sheet
    Print Pin
    5 from 9 votes

    Texas Toast Pizzas

    Texas Toast Pizzas: These mini pizzas are cooked on frozen garlic toast, making it so easy, with tons of flavor! Now, everyone can make their own pizza on pizza night and have fun with their favorite toppings!
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine Italian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 pizzas
    Calories 262kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 8 slices Texas toast
    • 2 cups shredded mozzarella
    • 1 cup pizza sauce or more/less depending on your preference
    • 24 pepperonis or more or less depending on your preference
    • chopped fresh parsley optional

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 425 degrees.
    • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Place Texas toast on baking sheet, in single layer.
    • Spread a little pizza sauce on each piece of bread. (Approximately a couple of Tablespoons of sauce on each piece, or more if you prefer more sauce!
    • Spread the sauce evenly on each piece.
    • Sprinkle mozzarella cheese on top of pizza sauce. (As much as you'd like but we used about 2 cups – or an 8 ounce bag – of shredded mozzarella for the 8 pieces of garlic bread.)
    • Place pepperoni on each piece of bread, or your favorite toppings. We used 3 pepperonis for each slice.
    • Place baking sheet in to the oven and bake for about 5 minutes.
      Optional: If you'd like to switch the oven to "broil" at the last minute to help the pizzas turn golden brown, you definitely can.
    • Optional: Sprinkle with chopped fresh parsley

    Notes

    Storage
    If you have leftover pizzas, store them in an airtight container with a lid, cover with plastic wrap or place in a plastic, ziptop bag.
    To reheat: You can place them back in the oven on a cookie sheet, warm in the microwave, or our favorite… reheat them in the air fryer to help them taste like they were just made!
    Top Tip: Only make as many as you need, and keep the ingredients on hand for last-minute meals. The ingredients are all something that can either be frozen or stored in the pantry for quite a while.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1pizza | Calories: 262kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 28mg | Sodium: 625mg | Potassium: 129mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 322IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 147mg | Iron: 6mg

    Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf

    March 17, 2025

    Slice of Stove Top Meatloaf placed on top of mashed potatoes, sitting next to green beans.

    Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf uses the boxed seasoned stuffing mix for a flavorful, binder, to make this delicious old-fashioned, comfort food recipe.

    A slice of Stove Top Stuffing meatloaf on top of mashed potatoes, next to green beans.

    A Classic Meatloaf Recipe with a Twist

    In under an hour, this easy meatloaf recipe is prepped, baked and ready for eating.

    Using Stove Top Stuffing in meatloaf is such a great binder instead of using the traditional saltine crackers, or bread crumbs like I use in my chicken meatloaf recipe.

    Stove Top Stuffing can add a delicious flavor to recipes, which is why I also use it in this Crock Pot Chicken and Stuffing recipe and this Chicken and Stuffing Casserole.

    Slice of Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf on top of mashed potatoes.

    Recipe Highlights:

    • Ease of This Recipe: This meatloaf recipe is great for all skill levels, especially for beginners in the kitchen.
    • Texture and Flavor: A tender, yet hearty savory bite of the meatloaf, combined with the smooth and sweet meatloaf topping is a tasty combination.
    • Old-Fashioned Recipe: Meatloaf is a vintage dish that has been on Sunday dinner tables for years. Even though Stove-Top Stuffing hasn’t been around as long as meatloaf, I still consider this a classic dish that families will enjoy having together around the table for years to come.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Is meatloaf made with Stove Top Stuffing good?

    It absolutely is! Stove Top Stuffing helps add flavor to meatloaf and helps make it moist with a delicious texture.

    Can I use Stove Top Stuffing instead of breadcrumbs?

    Yes! Stove Top Stuffing is a pre-packaged mix of bread and seasoning that replaces bread crumbs in a classic meatloaf recipe.

    Should you bake meatloaf covered or uncovered?

    Baking meatloaf uncovered is recommended, although if burning is a concern, due to rack placement or oven habits, it can be covered for the last half of baking.

    What to Serve with Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf

    This dish pairs really well with mashed potatoes & gravy, Southern green beans and roasted broccoli. 

    Ingredients Needed: (See recipe card below for the full recipe)

    • ground beef – lean ground beef is recommended to cut down on the juices/fat that will form in the pan
    • water – this will be mixed with the eggs
    • eggs – Eggs will help bind the ingredients together to help the meatloaf hold it’s shape.
    • Stovetop Stuffing Mix – I use the chicken flavor but you can also use the “Savory Herbs” flavor.
    • yellow onion and garlic – Using garlic and onion powder instead will work too but the flavor is amplified when using fresh.
    • salt and pepper – Simple seasonings in addition to the seasonings in the Stove Top Stuffing to help round out the recipe.
    • ketchup – Some of this will be mixed in to the meatloaf itself and some will be mixed with brown sugar for the topping.
    • Worcestershire sauce – Lea and Perrines is the brand I recommend for all recipes that require Worcestershire sauce. It has a much better flavor than other brands.
    Labeled ingredients sitting on counter to make Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf.

    How to Make Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf

    Preheat the oven to 350°F, and spray a 9×5 loaf pan with non-stick cooking spray.

    Eggs and water mixed together in glass mixing bowl.
    Stove Top Stuffing poured in to egg and water mixture, in glass bowl.

    In a large mixing bowl, beat together the eggs and water using a fork or electric hand mixer. Beat for about 1 minute. 

    Add in the stuffing mix, onion, garlic, salt, and pepper. Mix well using a large serving spoon. 

    Onions, salt and pepper added to Stove Top Stuffing and meat mixture.
    Ground beef, ketchup and seasonings added to bowl with wooden spoon.

    Add in ground beef, ½ cup ketchup and ¼ cup Worcestershire sauce. Mix well until the ground beef is evenly distributed throughout the mixture and well combined.

    Ketchup and brown sugar in small ramekin.
    Ketchup and Worcestershire sauce mixture spread on top of uncooked meatloaf.

    In a small mixing bowl, combine the remaining ketchup and Worcestershire sauce. Mix with a fork until fully combined. 

    Pour glaze over meatloaf, spreading evenly with the back of a spoon. 

    When the mixture is fully combined, pour into the bottom of the loaf pan, pressing the mixture firm into the edges and empty spaces and flat on the top. Set aside. 

    Baked Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf in loaf pan.

    Place meatloaf inside the oven and bake for 45-50 minutes.

    When done, carefully remove from heat and allow to cool inside the loafpan for about 5 minutes before serving. 

    Sliced Stove Top Stuffing meatloaf on rectangle platter.

    Storage Instructions

    Allow the meatloaf to fully cool, and then cover the loaf pan with plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and store in the refrigerator. You can also remove the meatloaf from the loaf pan and store it in an airtight container. This meatloaf recipe will keep in the fridge for 3-4 days.

    To Freeze: You can also freeze this meatloaf in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator before reheating in the oven, microwave or air fryer.

    Slice of Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf on top of mashed potatoes, sitting next to green beans.

    Top Tips

    • Any Stove Top Flavor: Use your preference of stuffing flavor. Turkey, chicken, herbs and cornbread all work great!
    • Flatten Meatloaf Before Baking: Use the back of a wooden spoon or rubber spatula to flatten the meatloaf before cooking. 
    • Sweeter Meatloaf: For a little sweeter of a glaze, add 1 teaspoon of brown sugar to the ketchup and worcestershire sauce. 
    • Do not overuse the Worcestershire sauce, it will cut the flavor of the stuffing too much. 

    Craving More Comfort Food Recipes

    • Church supper recipes collage.
      Church Supper Recipes
    • Close up of cooked salmon patties on a plate, with fresh parsley sprinkled on top.
      Old-Fashioned Salmon Patties Recipe
    • A sliced, boneless pork chop that was baked in the oven, sitting on a plate.
      How to Cook Pork Chops in the Oven (Bone-In & Boneless Guide)
    • A wooden spoon dishing out a serving of meatball casserole in a 9x13 baking dish.
      Meatball Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Slice of Stove Top Meatloaf placed on top of mashed potatoes, sitting next to green beans.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf

    Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf is a spin on the classic recipe using boxed stuffing mix instead of bread crumbs, making it easy and flavorful!
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 310kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 1 9×5 loaf pan
    • 2 mixing bowls
    • fork or hand mixer

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup water
    • 2 large eggs
    • 6 ounce box of Stove Top Stuffing mix
    • ½ cup yellow onion chopped
    • 3 cloves garlic minced
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper
    • ¼ cups Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 pound lean ground beef

    Glaze Ingredients

    • ¾ cup ketchup
    • 2 teaspoons Worcestershire sauce

    Instructions

    • Prepare the oven to 350 degrees and spray a 9×5 loaf pan with non-stick cooking spray.
    • In a large mixing bowl, beat together the eggs and water using a fork or electric hand mixer. Beat for about 1 minute. 
    • Add in the stuffing mix, onion, garlic, salt, and pepper. Mix well using a large serving spoon. 
    • Add in ground beef, ½ cup ketchup and ¼ cup Worcestershire sauce. Mix well until the ground beef is evenly distributed throughout the mixture and well combined.
    • When the mixture is fully combined, pour into the bottom of the loaf pan, pressing the mixture firm into the edges and empty spaces and flat on the top. Set aside. 
    • In a small mixing bowl, combine the remaining ketchup and 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce to create a glaze. Mix with a fork until fully combined. 
    • Pour glaze over meatloaf, spreading evenly with the back of a spoon.
    • Place meatloaf inside the oven and cook for 45-50 minutes.
    • When done, carefully remove from heat and allow to cool inside the loafpan for about 5 minutes before serving. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 310kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 85mg | Sodium: 1710mg | Potassium: 939mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 245IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 6mg

    Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole

    March 16, 2025

    Spoonful of Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole.

    Comforting, classic, easy. Everyone loves when dinner hits those notes, and this Chicken and Stove Top Stuffing Casserole fits the bill! A few ingredients are all it takes and this dinner recipe is on the table, and is similar to the Crock Pot Stove Top Stuffing Chicken.

    Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole on wooden spatula, lifting out of casserole dish.

    Chicken casseroles are so popular and it’s easy to see why. Another similar casserole, this chicken pot pie casserole, uses pre-made biscuits, and will be fun to switch in and out with this one!

    Everyone is familiar with layering tater tots in chicken casseroles, but what about stuffing? It’s the ultimate comfort food, super easy carb that is a fan favorite. Adding chicken and cheese makes it ten times better.

    If you aren’t a huge chicken fan, use up your leftover ham and make a ham and Swiss over noodles casserole. Honestly, I love casserole recipes for the fact they are easy or they use up what you have on hand.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only 4 ingredients (not counting the S&P!), this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
    • Use what you’ve got: Feel free to swap in differently seasoned stuffing or any cream soup in the pantry.
    • Ready in an hour: An hour might seem long, but it’s only hands-on when cooking the stuffing and layering. Then you can get homework or housework done while it bakes.

    Stuffing Casserole Recipe Ingredients

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for making Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole.
    • Stuffing – I love regular chicken flavored Stove Top Stuffing Mix, but you can use any brand or flavor. Prepare to box directions. Buy an extra box and make this Meatloaf with Stove Top Stuffing tomorrow night!
    • Chicken breast – Use boneless skinless breasts and dice into bite-sized pieces before tossing into your baking dish. You can also use chicken thighs if you prefer.
    • Shredded cheese – Monterey Jack pairs nicely, and so would Swiss! Use your favorite.
    • Cream soup – Cream of chicken will keep the chicken flavor strong and give you a nice, comforting casserole.

    Variations in Chicken Stuffing Bake

    Just about everything can be switched up! This is a great casserole to play chef and make your own combinations.

    Swap one can of soup out for cream of celery soup or cream of mushroom soup. Use cheddar for a stronger cheese flavor. Try herbed stuffing for more interest. Or even add veggies to sneak some vegetables such as peas and carrots in for the kids.

    How to Make Easy Chicken and Stuffing Casserole

    This is so simple to make, you can whip it up in 15 minutes and then let it bake. Simply make the stuffing while the oven preheats, layer, and go!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Preheat the oven and grease a baking dish before proceeding.

    Steps 1-4 for making Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole.

    STEP 1. Dice the chicken. Cut the chicken into bite-sized pieces and layer to cover the baking dish. Sprinkle with salt and pepper to taste (Image 1).

    STEP 2. Sprinkle the cheese. Layer the cheese evenly over the chicken (Image 2).

    STEP 3. Spread the soup. Use a rubber spatula to carefully spread the condensed soup over the cheese (Image 3).

    Tip: If it’s easier to spread the soup over the chicken and then sprinkle the cheese overtop, go right ahead! The order of these two layers isn’t super important.

    STEP 4. Add stuffing. Arrange the prepared stuffing mixture over the soup layer. Do not mix the layers together (Image 4).

    STEP 5. Bake. Bake the casserole until the chicken is fully cooked and the stuffing is browned.

    Baked Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole in white baking dish on white counter.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Cover with foil. If the stuffing is browning too quickly, tent the dish loosely with foil while the chicken finishes cooking.
    • More chicken. This recipe calls for 2 or 3 chicken breasts. The key is to have just enough to make a single layer of diced chicken in the bottom of the dish.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can you put raw chicken in a casserole dish?

    Yes! It’s perfectly fine to layer raw chicken with prepared ingredients like stuffing because we are baking immediately. You would not want to layer everything and tuck it away for later. The safest way to use raw chicken is to layer it in the dish, then wash your hands thoroughly. Continue with the layers and bake. Use a thermometer to ensure the chicken is cooked through.

    Can you put hot stuffing on raw chicken?

    Yes, as stated above, we are cooking the casserole immediately in the oven so we are safe to layer the different temperature ingredients.

    What can I substitute for butter in stovetop stuffing?

    The box of stuffing mix generally calls for butter when preparing. If you are looking to use something else, give olive oil or vegan buttery sticks a try. Do keep in mind that the soup and cheese are of course dairy, so just swapping out the butter doesn’t make this dish dairy-free. Some just prefer to use other fats, such as margarine.

    Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole serving in white plate.

    What to Serve with 4 Ingredient Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole

    I love a leafy green salad with a casserole. Hot and cold, and light vs. heavy really complements things well.

    Serve up a green veggie on the side, like green beans or garlic roasted broccoli would also pair nicely. Kids often love carrots, so serve them raw or cooked.

    A bite of Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole on fork.

    Storage Instructions

    Store any leftovers, once cooled, in an airtight container or cover the baking dish with foil or plastic wrap, in the fridge for up to 3 days.

    The stuffing may be soggy when stored, so reheating in the oven is recommended. Only reheat the portion you will be eating – do not reheat the casserole more than once.

    More Casserole Recipes You’ll Love

    • Southern broccoli casserole with cheese
      Southern Broccoli Casserole
    • french onion beef casserole scooped up out of white dish
      French Onion Beef Casserole
    • Cheeseburger Casserole
      Cheeseburger Casserole
    • doritos chicken casserole on plate
      Doritos Chicken Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Spoonful of Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole.
    Print Pin
    5 from 7 votes

    Stove Top Stuffing Chicken Casserole

    Comforting, classic, easy. This Chicken and Stove Top Stuffing Casserole fits the bill! A few ingredients are all it takes for an easy dinner.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 363kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 9×13 Baking dish

    Ingredients

    • 2-3 boneless skinless chicken breasts cut into bite-sized pieces
    • Salt & pepper to taste
    • 1 ½ cups shredded Monterey Jack cheese
    • 2 cans cream of chicken soup 10.5oz each
    • 2 boxes chicken flavored stuffing (I used Stove Top) 6oz each, prepared per box instructions

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Coat a 9×13 baking dish with nonstick spray.
    • Add the raw chicken breasts to the prepared dish and add salt and pepper to taste.
      2-3 boneless skinless chicken breasts, Salt & pepper to taste
    • Next, layer the cheese evenly over the chicken. Spread the cans of soup over the cheese (do not add liquid).
      1 ½ cups shredded Monterey Jack cheese, 2 cans cream of chicken soup
    • Top the dish with the prepared stuffing mix. Keep the ingredients in layers; do not mix together!
      2 boxes chicken flavored stuffing (I used Stove Top)
    • Bake for 45 minutes or until the chicken reaches 165°F with an instant read thermometer and the stuffing is browned and crispy.

    Notes

    • If you don't want your stuffing to get too browned, cover the dish with tinfoil when there's 15 minutes left of baking. This is not required, however, because baking it uncovered gives the stuffing a little crunch.
    • The number of chicken breasts used depends on the size. Just use enough chicken to mostly cover the bottom of the pan.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 363kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 1333mg | Potassium: 376mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 299IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 161mg | Iron: 3mg

    Baked Chicken Cutlets

    March 15, 2025

    Sliced baked chicken cutlets on white plate, next to green beans.

    These crispy baked chicken cutlets are made using just a few simple ingredients and are a kid favorite. Ready in about 30 minutes or less, they’re perfect for an easy dinner recipe, much like our baked chicken drumsticks.

    Baked chicken cutlet on white plate sitting next to green beans.

    These oven-baked chicken cutlets have a crispy outside and a juicy inside, making them one of our favorite recipes yet.

    With chicken being such a versatile ingredient, it’s great to have multiple chicken recipes to turn to, so you can switch things up from time to time.

    Rotating this chicken cutlets recipe with other simple recipes like you can find in this list of chicken breast recipes, you’ll be able to fill out your meal plan with delicious ideas! But some of our favorites to rotate for an easy dinner are these air fryer chicken tenders made with panko crumbs and these simple chicken bites.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What are Chicken Cutlets?

    Chicken cutlets are boneless chicken breasts sliced in half, to make two thin chicken pieces.

    Usually, the chicken cutlets are then beaten, to flatten them to about ¼ of an inch thickness. This makes them easier, and quicker to cook and also helps stretch out the chicken for multiple servings.

    Why You’ll Love this Recipe

    1. It uses simple ingredients: Using only pantry and refrigerator staples makes this recipe something that you can make often because you’ll more than likely have the ingredients on hand when you need something quick to make for dinner.
    2. Ready in only 30 minutes: Talk about a quick and easy dinner idea! This recipe, from start to finish, only takes about half an hour.
    3. Serve different ways: Serve alone, or place on top of a delicious creamy pasta like this cream cheese pasta or on them creamy lemon chicken pasta.

    Ingredients Needed

    Here’s what you’ll need to make this easy chicken recipe. I've highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes, below. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients on counter for baked chicken cutlets.
    • Bread Crumbs: The bread crumbs give the outside a crispy coating on the chicken. We use Italian-seasoned bread crumbs and feel it gives it great flavor but you can use your favorite type, such as plain, garlic & herb, etc. I use panko crumbs on this crispy panko chicken recipe though.
    • Seasonings: Lemon pepper, seasoning salt, and optional fresh parsley are what we use for this recipe but feel free to add garlic powder, onion powder, etc. Just keep in mind that the breadcrumbs may already have salt, and different seasonings already.
    • Parmesan Cheese: Grated parmesan cheese works best to blend in with the bread crumbs for this recipe.
    • Chicken breasts: Boneless, skinless chicken breasts are best for this recipe, for easy slicing. We also use these in our sandwiches, such as in this chicken club sandwich recipe and this cheesy chicken recipe!

    How to Prep for Baked Chicken Cutlets

    It requires very little effort to cook this chicken breast cutlets recipe but here are a few tips to help you get started, and answers to questions that you may have:

    What Temperature Should I Bake Chicken Cutlets at?

    Bake the breaded chicken cutlets at 400 degrees F. for 15-20 minutes. However, if you’re afraid that will cook the chicken too fast, you can cook it at 350° F. for longer, until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165° F.

    What can I pound chicken with?

    To make thin chicken cutlets, the best way is to wrap whole chicken breasts in plastic wrap, and then beat it with a meat mallet or rolling pin.

    How to Cook Chicken Cutlets

    If you’re tired of storebought, frozen chicken tenders and nuggets, you’ll love how easy it is to make this homemade breaded chicken. Plus, when you’re making this at home, you’ll know what’s in it, which makes me feel better when I’m making dinner for the kids.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Prep the Cutlets

    It’s easy to create the cutlets and prep them for baking. Here are the easy steps for this delicious recipe:

    4 image collage of steps 1-4 of baked chicken cutlets recipe.
    1. Preheat the oven and line a baking sheet with parchment paper, and then slice the chicken breasts in half, lengthwise.
    2. Then place them between two pieces of plastic wrap (or in a Ziploc bag). Beat with a meat mallet or rolling pin until about ¼ inch thick. 
    3. Mix bread crumbs, cheese, lemon pepper, and seasoning salt together in a shallow bowl.
    4. Scramble the eggs and milk together in a shallow bowl to make an egg wash..
    Steps 5-8 of how to bake chicken cutlets.
    1. To bread the chicken, dip one piece of chicken in the egg mixture.
    2. Then dredge it in the breadcrumb mixture.
    3. Place the breaded chicken cutlets on the prepared baking sheet in a single layer. Repeat until all chicken pieces have been breaded. 
    4. Bake for 15 to 20 minutes and top with chopped fresh parsley just before serving.  
    Baked chicken cutlet on wooden spatula, above baking sheet.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Golden Brown Chicken: To help give the chicken a golden brown color, spray cooking spray on top of breaded chicken pieces just before putting in the oven. 
    • Keep Chicken Warm and Crispy: To keep warm and crispy, place a cooling rack in a baking sheet; then place the cooked chicken on the cooling wire rack. Keep the rack in a warm oven until ready to serve.

    How to Store and Reheat Baked Chicken Cutlets

    • Store: If you have leftover chicken cutlets, allow them to fully cool and then store in an airtight container for 3-5 days.
    • Reheat: If reheating, you can bake them at 350° for about 10 minutes, or our favorite, is to reheat them in the air fryer to help keep that crispiness.
    Baked chicken cutlet on white plate, next to green beans.

    What to Serve with Oven-Baked Chicken Cutlets

    So many different sides can go with this crispy chicken cutlets recipe for an easy meal. From starchy sides to vegetable sides like this bacon-wrapped asparagus, or these reader favorites:

    • Bread: Like when you visit your favorite restaurant, they may greet you with a warm basket of bread. These Bisquick cheddar biscuits are cheesy and they only use 6 simple ingredients. If traditional bread is more your style, you may prefer these easy homemade biscuits or this Italian bread recipe.
    • Salads: This leafy green salad is one of top-rated recipes here for a side salad, so it’s always a great choice. Or, these cold pasta salad recipes are an amazing choice to serve alongside a protein.
    • Green Vegetables: A green vegetable like these roasted brussels sprouts, always look and taste amazing, paired with a crispy chicken recipe. This garlic-roasted broccoli is easy to make in the oven, and is one of our favorite side dish recipes.
    Sliced crispy chicken cutlet piece on fork, holding up above plate.

    Recipe FAQs

    Have some other questions about making baked breaded chicken cutlets? Here are answers that can help:

    Is it better to bake chicken at 350° or 400°?

    You can bake it at both, and multiple different temperatures. Baking at 350° will bake slower but could prevent the chicken from cooking too fast and drying out. However baking at 400° will bake it faster, and help give it that special crispy outside that you’re looking for. Just make sure the internal temperature reaches 165° F when checked with a meat thermometer.

    What tenderizes chicken the best?

    Using a meat mallet or rolling pin to pound the chicken will help tenderize the meat.

    Should I bake chicken cutlets on a pan or foil?

    We actually prefer baking breaded chicken on parchment paper, on a baking pan.

    More Chicken Recipes

    If you love easy chicken recipes like this one, we think you’ll also love these dishes that have become reader favorites:

    • Fried chicken sliders on white plate, topped with mayo, lettuce and pickles.
      Fried Chicken Sliders
    • Crispy Chicken Burger
      Crispy Chicken Burger (KFC Zinger Burger)
    • Get ready for some major comfort food. Lasagna Stuffed Chicken is packed with three cheeses and red sauce for the ultimate low carb meal.
      Lasagna Stuffed Chicken
    • Close up photo of a spoonful of a creamy chicken and cheese casserole topped with crispy browned tater tots
      Chicken Tater Tot Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Sliced baked chicken cutlets on white plate, next to green beans.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Baked Chicken Cutlets

    These baked chicken cutlets are not only easy to make but they use simple ingredients and they're ready in about 30 minutes or less!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 239kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • baking sheet
    • knife
    • plastic wrap
    • Rolling Pin or meat mallet
    • 2 shallow bowls

    Ingredients

    • 1½ pounds boneless skinless chicken breast (about 2 large breasts)
    • 1 cup Italian bread crumbs
    • 2 tablespoons parmesan cheese
    • 1 teaspoon lemon pepper
    • 1 teaspoon seasoning salt
    • 2 eggs
    • 3 tablespoons milk
    • chopped fresh parsley optional

    Instructions

    • Prep the equipment: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Make the cutlets: Slice larger chicken breasts in half lengthwise. Then place them between two pieces of plastic wrap (or in a Ziploc bag). Beat with a meat mallet or rolling pin until about ¼ inch thick. 
      1½ pounds boneless skinless chicken breast
    • Prep the breading: Mix bread crumbs, cheese, lemon pepper, and seasoning salt together in a shallow bowl.
      1 cup Italian bread crumbs, 2 tablespoons parmesan cheese, 1 teaspoon lemon pepper, 1 teaspoon seasoning salt
    • Prep the wash: Scramble the eggs and milk together in a shallow bowl.
      2 eggs, 3 tablespoons milk
    • Bread the chicken: To bread the chicken, dip one piece of chicken in the egg mixture. Then dredge it in the bread crumb mixture and place on the prepared baking sheet. Repeat until all chicken pieces have been breaded. 
    • Bake the chicken: Bake for 15 to 20 minutes and top with chopped fresh parsley just before serving, if desired.
      chopped fresh parsley

    Notes

    • Achieve Golden Brown Chicken: To help give the chicken a golden brown color, spray cooking spray on top of breaded chicken pieces just before putting in the oven.
    • Keep Chicken Warm and Crispy: To keep warm and crispy, place a cooling rack in a baking sheet; then place the cooked chicken on the cooling rack. Keep the rack in a warm oven until ready to serve.
    • How to Store: If you have leftover chicken cutlets, allow them to fully cool and then store in an airtight container for 3-5 days.
    • How to Reheat: If reheating, you can bake them at 350° for about 10 minutes, or our favorite, is to reheat them in the air fryer to help keep that crispiness.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cutlet | Calories: 239kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 129mg | Sodium: 837mg | Potassium: 503mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 179IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 2mg

    Buttermilk Pie

    March 14, 2025

    Piece of buttermilk pie topped with whipped cream, sitting on round plate.

    A collection of vintage dessert recipes must include this buttermilk pie recipe. With only 8 simple ingredients, most of which are pantry staples, this pie recipe is ready in less than an hour.

    This recipe is one of my go-to desserts for a potluck, especially when you need something dependable.

    Slice of buttermilk pie with dollop of whipped cream on top, sitting on round plate.

    Jessica’s Recipe Notes

    • Ease: This pie is simple, and great for beginners.
    • Taste & Texture: Much like my egg custard pie, this has a smooth, custard filling, with a slightly tangy flavor due to the buttermilk.
    • Top Tip: Allow at least an hour for the buttermilk pie to cool before serving.

    Perfect for the holidays or anytime of year, this old-fashioned pie looks beautiful sitting on the dessert table next to other holiday-favorite pies like this pecan pie, sweet potato pie and this no-bake chocolate pie.

    It’s also a great recipe to make as a dessert for a church potluck or family get-together, as crowds seem to love vintage recipes. Another nostalgic Southern favorite is this traditional Sock It to Me Cake with its cinnamon pecan swirl.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Sliced buttermilk pie in clear, glass pie dish, sitting on counter.

    Ingredients for Buttermilk Pie Recipe

    Here are a few notes on some of the key ingredients to make this buttermilk pie recipe. See the recipe card below for exact measurements.

    Labeled ingredients for buttermilk pie, sitting on counter.
    • Pre-Made Pie Crust: I love a shortcut in the kitchen, and I often use storebought pie crust. But if you love a homemade take on this recipe, my buttery pie crust recipe is a great option.
    • Granulated Sugar: Adds a sweet contrast to the tangy flavor of the buttermilk.
    • Salted Butter: If you are only able to get unsalted butter, just add a pinch of salt. 
    • All-Purpose Flour: This helps thicken the batter of the pie so it sets and firms.
    • Buttermilk: Such a powerful ingredient in baked desserts, to add moisture. It’s the secret ingredient in my banana bread recipe too.
    • Nutmeg: This spice helps add flavor, depth and gives the pie a warm tone.

    If you have leftover buttermilk, you may also love to make this chocolate bread and these blueberry buttermilk muffins.

    How to Make Buttermilk Pie

    Here’s an overview of how to make this recipe. You can scroll down to the recipe card for the full instructions.

    Pre-made pie crust, crimped in clear pie plate.
    Form pie crust to pie plate
    Buttermilk pie ingredients mixed together in glass bowl, with whisk.
    Mix custard ingredients


    First, preheat the oven to 350°F.

    Next, place your premade pie crust into your pie pan and crimp the edges. Then, in a large mixing bowl, whisk together the granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, eggs, melted butter, buttermilk, vanilla extract, and nutmeg.

    Buttermilk pie batter poured in to unbaked pie crust in clear pie plate.
    Add buttermilk mixture to pie crust
    Baked buttermilk pie in clear pie plate, sitting on counter.
    Bake buttermilk custard

    Next, pour your buttermilk filling into your pie crust, and bake for 40 to 45 minutes until the custard has set.

    Allow the pie to cool for an hour before serving. 

    Slice of buttermilk pie, sitting on round plate, with fork cutting a bite off.

    How to Serve Buttermilk Pie

    When the pie has fully cooled, it can be served alone or it’s also delicious with a dollop of whipped cream on top, with ice cream, fruit, or your favorite drizzle or vanilla sauce.

    You can also warm the pie back up in the microwave for 10-15 seconds if you prefer a warm slice of buttermilk pie.

    How to Store This Buttermilk Pie Recipe

    Leftover buttermilk pie should be stored tightly covered or in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    To freeze, wrap the whole pie in plastic wrap and then a layer of aluminum foil. If you want to take it further, place it in an extra-large Ziploc bag and freeze it for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight before serving.  

    Slice of buttermilk pie on plate, with whipped cream on top, sitting next to fruit.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the best way to cut a buttermilk pie?

    Buttermilk pie has a bit of a crust on the top. To get a good clean cut, take a large, serrated knife and score the crust. Do not cut all the way through the pie; just mark the slices and cleanly break the top crust for the slices. Then, take a paring knife or a straight blade and slice the rest of the way through each cut, getting the bottom crust. Be sure to wipe the blade between each slice to keep the cuts looking clean.

    How can I keep the edges of my pie from burning?

    If you notice that the edges of your pie are starting to get too brown but your pie still needs some more cooking time, you can use one of two options to help with this. One is that you can make a ring around the crust with aluminum foil, or you can use a pie ring that will fit perfectly over the edges of your pie and protect it from burning. 

    Can I make buttermilk pie a little less sweet?

    If you want to make your pie a little less sweet and a little tangier, then reduce your sugar by ¼ of a cup and add a touch more buttermilk. 

    How can I tell if my buttermilk pie is done?

    To tell if your pie is done, the edges will be golden, and the center will be set but still slightly jiggly. The custard will continue to firm up as it cools. Remember that just because you pull it out of the oven does not immediately stop the cooking process, and with custards, it is easy to overcook them if you wait until they are fully set while in the oven. 

    More Vintage Dessert Recipes

    • bread pudding in baking dish
      Bread Pudding Recipe: Easy Old Fashioned Recipe (With Video!)
    • slice of peach cobbler on white plate
      Easy Peach Cobbler with Canned Peaches
    • Slice of lemon meringue pie on small plate, with slice of lemon laying beside it.
      Lemon Meringue Pie
    • Serving of banana pudding on small plate.
      Quick & Easy Banana Pudding

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Piece of buttermilk pie topped with whipped cream, sitting on round plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Buttermilk Pie

    A vintage dessert, this Buttermilk Pie is a smooth custard with a tangy bite, baked in to a pie crust. A popular recipe for the holidays or anytime of year.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 slices
    Calories 504kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 9-inch pie plate
    • Large mixing bowl
    • Whisk
    •  Measuring cups and spoons

    Ingredients

    • 1 pie crust my homemade pie crust or store-bought
    • 1¼ cup granulated sugar
    • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour
    • 3 large eggs
    • ½ cup salted butter melted
    • 1 cup buttermilk
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 pinch nutmeg

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F.
    • Place your premade 1 pie crust into your pie pan and crimp the edges.
    • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the 1¼ cup granulated sugar, 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour, 3 large eggs, ½ cup salted butter, 1 cup buttermilk, 2 teaspoons vanilla extract, and 1 pinch nutmeg.
    • Pour your buttermilk filling into your pie crust.
    • Bake for 40 to 45 minutes until the custard has set.
    • Allow the pie to cool for an hour before serving. 

    Notes

    1. How can I keep the edges of my pie from burning?
      If you notice that the edges of your pie are starting to get too brown but your pie still needs some more cooking time, you can make a ring around the crust with aluminum foil, or you can use a pie ring that will fit perfectly over the edges of your pie and protect it from burning. 
    2. Can I make this pie a little less sweet?
      Yes, you can reduce your sugar by ¼ of a cup and add a touch more buttermilk. 
    3. How can I tell if my pie is done?
      The edges will be golden, and the center will be set but still slightly jiggly. The custard will continue to firm up as it cools. Remember that just because you pull it out of the oven does not immediately stop the cooking process, and with custards, it is easy to overcook them if you wait until they are fully set while in the oven. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 504kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 138mg | Sodium: 316mg | Potassium: 128mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 44g | Vitamin A: 674IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 1mg

    Best Banana Bread

    March 14, 2025

    Sliced banana bread on white platter

    This banana bread recipe is the one I come back to over and over. It’s soft, incredibly moist, and made with one simple ingredient that makes all the difference. If you've been searching for a banana bread that actually turns out every time, this is it.

    This recipe uses buttermilk for extra moisture and a tender crumb. It adds just enough richness and moisture to keep the bread from drying out, while also enhancing the overall flavor.

    Easy Banana Bread

    This is one of those recipes people come back to again and again because it just works.

    Bread recipes are one of our favorite recipes to bake but this banana bread is the BEST and is now a favorite in so many kitchens! While it’s moist and delicious on its own, it would be a fun treat to serve with some vanilla sauce, or even add some blackberries in this banana bread.

    If you love easy, comforting recipes like this, you may also enjoy these old-fashioned cake recipes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]
    Banana Bread Testimonial Review - Best
    A Fantabulosity reader thinks this is the best banana bread recipe too! Thank you for sharing Jeanne!

    Why You’ll Love This Banana Bread

    • Secret Ingredient: It’s buttermilk (or substitute with a combination of lemon juice and milk), that creates a moist, flavorful banana bread.
    • Classic and Flexible. You can add your favorite additions if you want something other than regular banana bread. For instance, chocolate chips, nuts, and blueberries are DELICIOUS in this recipe!
    • Extra Bananas: It’s a great way to use up bananas that are turning brown!
    This banana bread is UNBELIEVABLE! https://fantabulosity.com

    How to Make Banana Bread Moist

    To get the best results, use very ripe bananas, avoid overmixing the batter, and don't overbake. The buttermilk also helps create a soft texture that stays moist for days.

    What Baking Pan to Use for Banana Bread

    I’ve made this recipe using regular loaf pans and mini loaf pans. Honestly, it doesn’t matter to me which way I make it because it’s delicious either way. However, if making in mini loaf pans, you’ll want to bake it for less time.

    Mini Loaf Pans

    The first time I made this, I knew I wanted to use the CUTEST little mini loaf baking pan so I knew I need to adjust the bake time.

    If you’re using a mini loaf pan (since all can be different) just start checking the middle after about 20 minutes of baking, and remove them when a toothpick inserted into the middle comes out clean.

    Regular Loaf Pans

    My oven cooks SUPER fast, so I had to be cautious when it came to baking this banana bread. So where I had to bake my banana bread in regular size loaf pans for 40 minutes, it may take anywhere from 40-55 minutes for your oven.

    Periodically check with a toothpick until the center comes out clean after about 40 minutes.

    SIDE NOTE: Since I used two different pans, they both cooked differently too. One pan was much thinner than the other, so that loaf of bread finished before the other.

    How to Make the Best Banana Bread

    For the full list of ingredients and instructions all in one place, see the printable recipe card toward the bottom of this post!

    Easy Banana Bread

    Start with Ripe Bananas

    I’m not going to lie. When I see at least 3 bananas on my counter that are starting to turn a little brown, I get a little too excited.

    I despise eating bananas by themselves. But turn them into banana bread, and you can’t keep me out of it.

    For this recipe, start with ripe bananas.

    Don’t worry… if you need to make this old-fashioned banana bread NOW, and the store only had underripe bananas… you can ripen bananas for banana bread.

    Ripe bananas recipes

    Secret Ingredient – Buttermilk for Banana Bread

    I truly believe there’s an ingredient in this banana bread recipe that makes it so good, and moist.  Buttermilk. Yes, really!

    Buttermilk Substitute

    Don’t have buttermilk on hand, DON’T worry! In a small dish or bowl, mix together ½ cup milk with 2 teaspoons of lemon juice! Works perfect every time!

    Buttermilk makes banana bread moist!

    Banana Bread Batter

    With a mixer, mix the butter and the sugar.

    Banana Bread few ingredients - moist and the BEST

    Next, add in the mashed bananas and the eggs.

    How to mash bananas - ziploc bag

    Pro Tip: Throw your bananas into a Ziploc bag, seal, and mash them with your hands through the bag or with a rolling pin!

    flour, baking soda, salt mixture

    In a separate bowl, mix together your flour, baking soda, and salt.

    Alternate the flour mixture and the buttermilk

    Next, fold in the dry ingredients, alternating the buttermilk (or milk and lemon juice) with the flour.

    Mix together milk and lemon juice to make buttermilk for banana bread
    Mix together the banana bread ingredients

    Once that is mixed, you’re ready to add to your desired, greased baking dish.

    How Long to Bake Banana Bread in Oven

    Mini loaves take me about 20 minutes, and two regular loaf pans take about 40 minutes.

    Pour batter in to two different regular size loaf pans
    Banana Bread Recipe - Easy and the BEST

    How Long to Cool Banana Bread

    Once you remove your banana bread from the oven, let it sit a few minutes and then release it from the loaf pan to fully cool on a wire rack. (I do this when we want to eat it in a hurry.)

    Banana Bread - moist and the best

    Slice and serve!

    But do me a favor… if you’re making it just for fun, give it a try when it’s warm. You won’t regret it.

    FAQs and Expert Tips

    Can you use too many bananas in banana bread?

    YES! Using too much banana can make the bread soggy and too dense. This recipe calls for only 3 bananas (about 1 ½ cups of mashed bananas).

    How do you ripen bananas?

    If you have bananas that are not ripened but you want to make banana bread, place the bananas, still in the peels, on a baking sheet and bake in the oven at 300° until they turn black. See my tips on how to ripen bananas in the oven!

    Easy Banana Bread Recipe

    How Long Does Banana Bread Last?

    Banana bread can sit out on the counter for four days, and leaving it at room temperature will help it stay moist longer. Refrigerating banana bread can cause it to dry out faster.

    Can Banana Bread Sit Out Overnight?

    Yes, banana bread can sit out overnight.

    How to Freeze Banana Bread

    You can freeze banana bread for up to 3 months, as long as it’s stored correctly! It’s best to store, wrapped, in a freezer bag, freezer paper or even a vacuum-sealed bag. (Just remember to choose the setting that won’t flatten it out while removing the air.)

    More Bread Recipes You’ll Love:

    If you loved this recipe, then you’ll also love this Easy Bread Pudding Recipe and this Banana Bread Pudding! Or try this chocolate quick bread.

    If you love banana flavor for a sweet treat, this banana pudding poke cake recipe is one to save.

    Recipe

    Sliced banana bread on white platter
    Print Pin
    4.52 from 95 votes

    Best Banana Bread Recipe (Moist, Easy, and Never Dry)

    It's the secret ingredient that makes this the BEST banana bread recipe that makes it so moist and so delicious. Plus, it's easy, quick and uses simple ingredients.
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 352kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 2 loaf pans or mini loaf pans
    • 2 mixing bowls
    • measuring spoons and cups
    • hand mixer or stand mixer

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup buttermilk or you can combine ½ cup milk with 2 teaspoons lemon juice & set aside to curdle
    • ¾ cup butter softened (1½ sticks)
    • 1½ cup granulated sugar
    • 1½ cup very ripe bananas mashed, which is about 3 large bananas
    • 2 eggs
    • 2 cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon salt

    Mix-Ins (optional):

    • chocolate chips
    • nuts walnuts or pecans

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 325 degrees F. In a mixing bowl, cream the butter and the sugar.
      ¾ cup butter, 1½ cup granulated sugar
    • Add in the mashed bananas and eggs. Mix together until well combined.
      1½ cup very ripe bananas, 2 eggs
    • In a separate bowl, mix together the flour, baking soda, and salt.
      2 cups all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking soda, 1 teaspoon salt
    • Add the flour mixture and the buttermilk alternately to the wet mixture, and mix with a hand mixer on low or by hand until combined. (If you're adding chocolate chips/nuts, add to mixture and hand stir to combine.)
      ½ cup buttermilk, chocolate chips, nuts
    • If baking in regular-size loaf pans (split batter in half between the two.) 
      If using mini loaf pans, fill each cavities about half way.
    • If baking in regular-size loaf pans, bake at 325 for 40-45 minutes. (Some have stated their ovens do better at baking for 50-55 minutes.) 
       If baking in mini loaf pans, bake at 325 and begin checking after 20 minutes with a toothpick to see if it comes out clean. (Because each mini loaf size is different like mentioned above.)

    Video

    Notes

    How long does banana bread last?
    Banana bread can sit out on the counter for four days. Store in a bag or airtight container so it doesn’t dry out easily.
    How to Freeze Banana Bread:
    You can freeze banana bread for up to 3 months, as long as it’s stored correctly! It’s best to store, wrapped, in a freezer bag, freezer paper or even a vacuum-sealed bag. (Just remember to choose the setting that won’t flatten it out while removing the air.)

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice (⅛ loaf) | Calories: 352kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 88mg | Sodium: 611mg | Potassium: 124mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 625IU | Vitamin C: 1.2mg | Calcium: 33mg | Iron: 1.7mg

    Creamy Crock Pot Pork Chops

    March 10, 2025

    Pork chops cooked in the crock pot, sitting on plate with gravy, mashed potatoes and a biscuit.

    It doesn’t get much easier than these creamy crock pot pork chops. Boneless pork chops are slow cooked in just a handful of ingredients until tender, which creates a delicious gravy to serve on top.

    Two pork chops with a creamy sauce, sitting on top of mashed potatoes, and next to cheese biscuits.

    Dinner recipes with few ingredients are key to a quick and easy supper. These boneless pork chops smothered in a creamy gravy are tender, flavorful, and delicious served with mashed potatoes, noodles, or your favorite vegetable.

    Pork chops can be cooked in many different ways, and once you’ve tried this recipe, you’ll also want to try these BBQ-baked pork chops, these broiled pork chops, these deep-fried pork chops with gravy, and these grilled pork chops for a smoky, outdoor option.

    Why You’ll Love These Slow Cooker Pork Chops

    • Handful of Ingredients: It only takes 4 ingredients to make this recipe, and 3 of them are pantry ingredients! Keep the pork chops in the refrigerator or the freezer for a recipe that’s easy to turn to.
    • Slow Cooker Recipe: All you have to do when cooking pork chops in the crock pot, is place the pork chops in, season them, and pour the soups on top. Turn the crock pot on, and the pork chops will slow cook and be ready for you in a few hours.
    • Easy to Make: Simple toss the ingredients in to the crock pot and it does the cooking for you. It doesn’t get much easier than that!
    • Comforting Flavors: The ranch seasoning and the creaminess of the soups, give this cut of meat tons of flavor with the gravy that it creates as it cooks.

    Ingredients

    Here’s all you’ll need to make these crock pot pork chops:

    Ingredients for making crock pot pork chops, sitting on counter.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Boneless Pork Chops – You can also do bone-in pork chops if that’s what you have on hand but boneless makes for easier eating.
    • Ranch Dressing Seasoning – Either the buttermilk dressing mix or the regular ranch packets will work for this. The package of seasoning seasons the meat without having to use a lot of individual spices.
    • Cream of Chicken Soup & Cream of Mushroom Soup – The canned soups mix with the seasoning, and then create a gravy that smothers the pork chops.

    How to Make Crock Pot Pork Chops

    Boneless pork chops seasoned with ranch seasoning, resting in crock pot.
    1. Place pork chops in bottom of crock pot, making sure they don’t overlap so they cook evenly. Sprinkle on ranch.
    Canned soups mixed together in a glass bowl.
    2. Mix two soups together in a mixing bowl.

    TIP: You can spray the inside of your crock pot with nonstick spray if desired but I found that the pork doesn’t stick to the crock pot, so there’s not a need.

    Soup mixture poured over pork chops that are sitting in crock pot.
    3. Pour soup mixture on to pork chops.
    Cooked pork chops and gravy in crock pot.
    4. Cook on low for 6-8 hours.

    Recipe Tips:

    • Additional Seasonings – This recipe can be made with additional seasonings and ingredients to achieve a different flavor if desired. Some ideas could be, garlic, red pepper flakes for heat, or even a dollop of sour cream.
    • Ways to Use Leftovers – If there are leftovers, they can be reheated and enjoyed the same way. Or, the pork chops can be sliced or chopped and served in tacos, in pasta, or even on top of nachos. I share this same tip in my Fantabulous Dinner Theme System that takes the guesswork out of meal planning by assigning a fun, flexible theme to each night of the week.
    • Fresh Parsley – Sprinkling fresh, chopped parsley on top gives this dish beautiful color.
    • For complete temperature and timing guidance if cooking these in the oven at some point, see our full guide on how to cook pork chops in the oven.
    Cooked boneless pork chop being held by tons, above crock pot.

    Storage Tips:

    • Leftovers: Allow the creamy pork chops to fully cool and then store them with the gravy in an airtight container and in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
    • Freezing: Allow pork chops to fully cool and then store in a freezer container or bag, and freeze for up to 3 months.
    • Reheating: The pork chops can be reheated in the microwave or oven on low, or placed back in the crock pot on low and warmed until fully reheated.

    Expert Tips and FAQs

    How do you keep pork chops from drying out in a crock pot?

    Covering the pork chops with soups will prevent the pork from drying out.

    Should I use bone-in or boneless pork chops for the crock pot?

    Boneless pork chops are recommended for easier eating. However, bone-in pork chops can be used and some believe that bone-in chops are more flavorful and juicier.

    Can I put frozen pork chops in the crock pot?

    You can, however, it’s recommended that pork chops are thawed first. Frozen pork chops can take longer to cook and frozen chops don’t allow the flavors to soak in as fast.

    Gravy covered pork chops that were cooked in the crock pot.

    I can’t wait for you to try these creamy slow cooker pork chops. This recipe is so easy that it can be made often and served over different items (i.e. mashed potatoes, rice or noodles) to help get different flavors to keep the rotation exciting.)

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Pork chops cooked in the crock pot, sitting on plate with gravy, mashed potatoes and a biscuit.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Creamy Crock Pot Pork Chops

    Crock pot pork chops only need 4 ingredients to make creamy, juicy boneless pork chops that create a gravy, and delicious served over mashed potatoes, rice or noodles.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 hours hours
    Total Time 3 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 people
    Calories 2637kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • Crock Pot
    • Mixing bowl

    Ingredients

    • 3-4 pounds boneless pork chops
    • 1 ounce package ranch dressing seasoning mix
    • 10.5 ounce can of cream of mushroom soup condensed, not with added water
    • 10.5 ounce can of cream of chicken soup condensed, not with added water

    Instructions

    • Place the 3-4 pounds boneless pork chops in the bottom of the crock pot, trying not to overlap the pork chops so they cook evenly.
    • Sprinkle the 1 ounce package ranch dressing seasoning mix over the top of the pork chops, trying to sprinkle it evenly.
    • In a small mixing bowl, mix together the 10.5 ounce can of cream of mushroom soup and 10.5 ounce can of cream of chicken soup. Then pour the soup mixture over the top of the pork chops, spreading it to cover the tops of the all of the pork.
    • Cover and cook on high for 3-4 hours or low for 6-8 hours.
    • Serve pork and gravy over mashed potatoes, noodles or rice.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1pork chop | Calories: 2637kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 314g | Fat: 119g | Saturated Fat: 42g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Monounsaturated Fat: 50g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 950mg | Sodium: 6980mg | Potassium: 5597mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 596IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 149mg | Iron: 12mg

    Carrot Cake Rice Krispie Treats

    March 7, 2025

    feature image of stacked rice Krispie treats drizzled with melted white chocolate

    Carrot Cake Rice Krispie Treats: Delicious cereal paired perfectly with grated carrots, mini marshmallows, and warm spices. Perfect for an Easter dessert, dessert charcuterie board, or Sunday brunch.

    If you’re looking for simple desserts or a fun new spin on carrot cake, this is the recipe for you! You’re going to take the flavor of carrot cake to the next level!

    stack of carrot cake rice krispie treats on a white plate

    You’ll also love making this Ding Dong Cake for another one of my reader favorites! Desserts that are this good are meant to be shared!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why This Recipe Works

    • The frosting! It’s topped with that undeniably delicious cream cheese frosting (that is homemade)! Forget about store bought, and make your own at home. So good and simple!
    • Ingredients: If you love carrot cake but don’t like making it, this is where these carrot cake rice Krispies shine! They have all the flavors of carrot cake without all the extra work.
    • Ready in just a few minutes: These rice Krispies treats are ready in 20-30 minutes of time! Perfect for a weekend snack or great for a delicious dessert to have after Easter dinner.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    list of ingredients to make rice krispie treats that taste like carrot cake
    • Mini marshmallows – you can also use large marshmallows and cut them down to smaller sizes.
    • White chocolate chips – using semi-sweet chocolate chips or dark chocolate chips is also an option to mix with this cereal mixture.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Add sprinkles: If you want to top these treats with sprinkles that are carrot shapes, little bits and changes like that are always welcomed.
    • Cream cheese mixture: If you’re not a fan of using cream cheese icing with the carrot cake mix, you don’t have to. You can easily top these cereal treats with any flavor of icing or even just a little bit of powdered sugar.
    • Add color: Adding a little bit of green food coloring to the frosting can make these treats really festive for the Easter holiday.

    How to Make Carrot Cake Rice Krispie Treats

    You’ll start by adding parchment paper to a 13X9 baking pan. You can also butter it to make it nonstick.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    melting the marshmallows in a pan
    Image 1
    coating the cereal with the melted marshmallows
    Image 2

    STEP 1: Melt the marshmallows. Add the mini marshmallows and the butter to a large pot. Turn the pot on low/medium heat and stir until everything is smooth and melted (Image 1).

    STEP 2: Coat the cereal. Take the pot off the heat and add the carrots, cereal, nutmeg, and cinnamon. Stir until the cereal is coated well (Image 2).

    Tip: As you are stirring the rice krispies, they will become thick and harder to stir. Just do your best to coat them completely.

    STEP 3: Pour. Pour the mixture into the prepared pan and gently press it down so that it’s even. Let it cool.

    Cream cheese and butter in glass bowl.
    Powdered sugar added in the glass bowl.

    STEP 4: Combine. Put the cream cheese and the butter into a bowl and mix with a mixer. Add the vanilla and the powdered sugar. Mix well.

    making the frosting
    Melted chocolate chips with cream cheese mixture.

    STEP 5: Melt and stir. Put the chocolate chips into a microwave-safe bowl and heat in 30-second increments. Be sure to stop and stir between each time.

    STEP 6: Stir. Combine the cream cheese mixture with the melted chocolate on low with a mixer.

    Cream cheese frosting in piping bag next to treats.
    Rice krispies on a cutting board and two on a white plate.

    STEP 7: Add to the top of the treats. Put the topping into a piping bag and then drizzle it over the top of the treats. Let cool, then cut into pieces and serve.

    plate of rice krispie treats

    Recipe Pro Tip

    • Thin out the chocolate. If you want to think out the melted chocolate chips, you can add a tiny bit of coconut oil to the mixture.
    four rice Krispie treats on a cutting board

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I store leftover rice krispies treats?

    To keep your new favorite recipe as fresh as possible for as long as possible, store them in an airtight container and keep them out of hot and cool areas of your kitchen.

    As long as the treats are sealed well, they should stay fresh for up to 4-5 days without issues.

    How do I keep the mixture from sticking to the edges of the pan?

    A few things can be done to keep this mixture from sticking to the pan. First, laying parchment paper down in the bottom of the pan and having it hang over the edges of the pan is a great way to prevent any type of sticking from happening.

    You can also use nonstick cooking spray so that way you don’t have to stress.

    Can I freeze rice krispie treats?

    Yes, you can. If you want to add these to the freezer, first be sure to wrap them in plastic wrap and then store them in a freezer-safe container. That way, they’re going to be protected from the harsh cold of the freezer and retain their amazing taste.

    To unthaw them, just move them to your fridge for a few hours or overnight. They should return to their traditional and typical texture once they are thawed.

    What other toppings can be added to these carrot cake treats?

    It’s really up to you and what you want, but you have options! You can add sprinkles, shredded coconut, crushed nuts, or even a few mini chocolate chips right on top. Whatever you want to add is totally up to you.

    More Delicious Rice Krispies Treats Recipes

    If you love cereal desserts as much as we do, here are other rice krispie recipes we think you'll love:

    • Rice krispie treats on wooden board.
      The BEST Rice Krispie Treats
    • Caramel Rice Krispie Treats
      Caramel Rice Krispie Treats
    • Oreo rice krispy treats stacked on top of one another.
      Oreo Rice Krispie Treats
    • Three chocolate rice krispie treats stacked on top of each other.
      Chocolate Rice Krispie Treats

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    feature image of stacked rice Krispie treats drizzled with melted white chocolate
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Carrot Cake Rice Krispie Treats

    These Carrot Cake Rice Krispie Treats are a fun and simple dessert, similar to the classic but with a fun carrot-cake flavor. Perfect for sharing!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 17 minutes minutes
    Total Time 22 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 255kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    •  Measuring cups and spoons of various sizes
    • mixing bowls of various sizes
    • electric mixer

    Ingredients

    • 4 tablespoons salted butter
    • 10 ounces mini marshmallows
    • 1½ teaspoons cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoons nutmeg
    • 6 cups Rice Krispies cereal
    • ¼ cup carrots grated

    Topping:

    • 2 ounces cream cheese softened
    • 1 tablespoon butter
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • ¼ teaspoon vanilla
    • ⅓ cup white chocolate chips

    Instructions

    • Prepare a 13×9 baking pan by lining it with parchment paper, or buttering. 
    • Place butter and marshmallows in a large pot and heat on low/medium heat, stirring frequently until melted and smooth. 
    • Remove from the heat and add in cinnamon, nutmeg, carrots and cereal. Stir until well incorporated and the cereal is evenly coated. 
    • Pour the mixture into your prepared pan and gently press it down evenly. 
    • Allow to cool then cut into even squares.

    To make the topping:

    • Place butter and cream cheese in a mixing bowl and mix with an electric mixer until well incorporated. Add in vanilla and powdered sugar and continue to mix until well incorporated. 
    • Place white chocolate chips in a microwave safe bowl and microwave in 30 second increments stirring in between until melted and smooth. 
    • Add the melted chocolate to the cream cheese mixture and mix on low until well mixed. 
    • Place the topping in a piping bag drizzle across the cut cereal treats individually or across the whole pan. Allow to cool before serving. 

    Notes

    Tips:
    • Hard to stir. As you are stirring the rice krispies, they will become thick and harder to stir. Just do your best to coat them completely.
    • Thin out the chocolate. If you want to think out the melted chocolate chips, you can add a tiny bit of coconut oil to the mixture.
    Leftovers: Store any leftover treats in an airtight container for 4-5 days.
    Freeze: Be sure to wrap them in plastic wrap and then store them in a freezer-safe container.
    Thaw: To unthaw them, just move them to your fridge for a few hours or overnight.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1g | Calories: 255kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 152mg | Potassium: 51mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 28g | Vitamin A: 1588IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 4mg

    The BEST Egg Salad Recipe

    March 6, 2025

    egg salad on croissant

    The BEST Egg Salad Recipe: This classic egg salad uses simple ingredients such as mayo, relish, optional red onion, seasoned salt, and a little pepper!

    Similar to our ham salad recipe, this egg salad sandwich is easy to make and is ready for a great lunch idea in just a few minutes.

    Egg salad on croissant, on white plate

    We are REALLY into salad recipes around here, and can’t get enough of them. But all salads don’t have to be “lettuce” salads, right? It’s definitely one of my favorite savory salads, along with this chicken salad recipe!

    Why You’ll Love This Egg Salad Recipe

    • Affordable: This classic egg salad recipe uses only a few ingredients and affordable ingredients, at that!
    • Meal Plan: Whether you want to make a batch to eat on for a quick lunch for the week, or to just keep a batch in the refrigerator for everyone to snack on, this recipe is perfect for that! I like to make a large batch of hard-boiled eggs in my Instant Pot, to snack on, and I usually use 6 of these eggs to make this egg salad!
    • Protein: Eggs are a great source of protein! I love feeding this to my family so it holds them over for a while, between meals!

    Ingredients

    See the full ingredients amounts and directions toward the bottom of this post, in the recipe card! Here are a few notes about some of the key ingredients:

    • Hard-Boiled Eggs – Tips below to cook them if you’re not using already cooked eggs
    • Mayo – Hellman’s or Best Foods mayonnaise is recommended and I’ve found this gives this egg salad recipe the best flavor.
    • Relish – Dill or sweet pickle relish can be used for this recipe.
    • Red Onion – This is optional and gives the egg salad a little crunch. Chop the onion in to small pieces, so it doesn’t overpower the egg salad.
    • Seasoned Salt – Regular salt can be used instead but seasoned salt takes the flavor to the next level.
    labeled ingredients on counter for egg salad

    How Do You Make Egg Salad?

    I’ve always found everyone else’s opinions of how you make egg salad super interesting. But I consider this a classic egg salad recipe because it’s what my momma made and it’s the type of egg salad I’ve had from others, as well!

    1. Peel your hard boiled eggs. (If you need to cook your eggs first, see the different cooking methods below!)
    2. Discard the shells and chop up the eggs (egg whites and egg yolks) in to small pieces. (You can use a cheese grater if you like the pieces of the eggs smaller, but we prefer larger pieces.)
    Hard boiled eggs, some peeled some not
    Peel hard boiled eggs
    Chopped hard boiled eggs on cutting board
    Chopped eggs

    Tip: If you’re just now cooking your eggs, (meaning you’re not using eggs that have already been hard boiled ahead of time) we find that we prefer the egg fully cooled before making the egg salad.

    1. Place chopped hard-boiled eggs in a medium bowl.
    2. Next, add in mayo, relish, red onion, seasoned salt, and pepper.
    Chopped eggs in mixing bowl
    Place eggs in bowl
    Seasonings added to eggs
    Add seasonings
    1. Stir until evenly combined, and it’s ready to eat!
    mixed egg salad in glass bowl

    What Kind of Bread for an Egg Salad Sandwich?

    That’s up to you of course, but an at-home egg salad sandwich served on a croissant is my absolute favorite. It reminds me of a delicious sandwich I’d get at a cafe for lunch!

    However, those aren’t always handy so regular sandwich bread, lightly toasted, is my next favorite!

    Other bread like rye, wheat, or even on a pita, is super delicious too!

    1. If serving this egg salad recipe on bread, place a small amount (about a ¼ cup) on a sliced croissant (or other bread).
    2. Top with your favorite toppings (We used a lettuce and slices of bacon.)
    egg salad on croissant
    Spread on bread
    egg salad sandwich topped with bacon
    Add bacon (if desired)

    How to Make Hard Boiled Eggs

    There are different ways you can cook hard-boiled eggs, which is why I left that out of the recipe because it’s up to you how you decide to make them!

    Tip: Fresh eggs tend to be harder to peel, so if you have eggs that are older than others (but still good!), it’s best to use those!

    1. Pressure Cook: Now although it doesn’t quite matter how clean the eggs peel, since you’re chopping the eggs up anyway, I have to say that cooking eggs in the pressure cooker, is my all-time favorite way. The peels practically SLIDE off, leaving the whites of the eggs beautiful!
    2. Stove Top: Place eggs in sauce pan, and cover with about 1 inch of cold water. Leave pot uncovered (no lid). Bring water to a boil, and then reduce heat to a simmer and let simmer for about 7 minutes. Prepare an ice bath and place eggs in ice bath to cool. When they’ve cooled, they are ready to peel.
    3. Air Fryer: Place eggs in air fryer and turn the temperature to 250 degrees. Cook for 16-17 minutes (air fryer temperatures can vary). Place eggs in ice bath. Peel when cooled.
    egg salad sandwich recipe

    More Ways to Use Hard Boiled Eggs

    If you’re making hard boiled eggs for this egg salad recipe, then you might as well go ahead and make extra hard-boiled eggs to use for these other easy recipes, such as:

    • The BEST Side Salad Recipe
    • Cauliflower Potato Salad – Low Carb
    • Tuna Salad Recipe
    • Extra hard-boiled eggs for snacking
    Hand holding egg salad sandwich

    Variations

    If you’re looking for different ways to enjoy this simple egg salad recipe, other than on bread, as a sandwich, here are some other great ideas:

    • Do you have crackers in the pantry? Buttery crackers or herb-flavored crackers are delicious with this egg salad!
    • Looking for low carb? Try using celery to dip in the egg salad for a quick snack!
    egg salad on bed of lettuce next to crackers

    Additional Ingredient Suggestions

    Want to experiment with some extra flavors for your easy egg salad recipe?

    Here are some ideas to get you started…

    • avocado
    • hot sauce
    • pesto
    • dill pickles
    • cilantro
    • basil
    • other fresh herbs
    • candied pecans
    • celery
    • lemon juice
    • yellow mustard
    • cumin
    • green onions
    • dijon mustard

    Storage Instructions

    If you happen to have leftover egg salad, place in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3-5 days.

    Related Recipes

    If you love sandwich recipes like this one, then you’ll also love this curry chicken salad and this chicken grilled cheese sandwich!

    Recipe

    egg salad on croissant
    Print Pin
    5 from 8 votes

    Egg Salad

    The BEST Egg Salad Recipe: This classic egg salad uses simple ingredients such as mayo, relish, optional red onion, seasoned salt, and a little pepper!
    Course Main Course, Salad
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 0 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 sandwiches
    Calories 325kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 6 hard boiled eggs
    • ½ cup mayo
    • ¼ cup relish dill or sweet
    • ¼ cup chopped red onion
    • 1 teaspoon seasoned salt
    • ½ teaspoon pepper

    Instructions

    • Peel your hard boiled eggs. (If you need to cook your eggs first, see in the notes, below, the different cooking methods.)
    • Discard the shells and chop up the eggs in to small pieces. (You can use a cheese grater if you like the pieces of the eggs smaller, but we prefer larger pieces.)
    • Add mayo, relish, onion, seasoned salt and pepper into the eggs, stir then until combined!
    • Serve about ¼ cup of egg salad on desired bread or dip with crackers!

    Notes

    How to Make Hard-Boiled Eggs
    There are different ways you can cook hard-boiled eggs, which is why I left that out of the recipe because it’s up to you how you decide to make them!
    1. Pressure Cook: Now although it doesn’t quite matter how clean the eggs peel, since you’re chopping the eggs up anyway, I have to say that cooking eggs in the pressure cooker, is my all-time favorite way. The peels practically SLIDE off, leaving the whites of the eggs beautiful!
    2. Stove Top: Place eggs in sauce pan, and cover with about 1 inch of water. Leave pot uncovered (no lid). Bring water to a boil, and then reduce heat to a simmer and let simmer for about 7 minutes. Prepare an ice bath and place eggs in ice bath to cool. When they’ve cooled, they are ready to peel.
    3. Air Fryer: Place eggs in air fryer and turn the temperature to 250 degrees. Cook for 16-17 minutes (air fryer temperatures can vary). Place eggs in ice bath. Peel when cooled.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving (egg salad only) | Calories: 325kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 292mg | Sodium: 1019mg | Potassium: 130mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 435IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg

    Rice Krispie Treats with Marshmallow Fluff

    March 1, 2025

    Three rice krispie treats made with marshmallow fluff, stacked on top of one another.

    Rice Krispie treats with marshmallow fluff are an easy, no-bake recipe that uses marshmallow fluff (or creme) instead of traditional marshmallows, making it a great alternative for when you can’t have marshmallows or don’t have any on hand.

    Rice krispie treats that are made with marshmallow fluff, stacked on top of each other.

    Important Notes:

    • Allow enough time to set: I find that I have to let these rice krispie treats sit for quite a while before cutting and eating, so they don’t fall apart.
    • Texture: What else I find, is that these have a different texture than traditional treats with marshmallows. To me, these treats have a cleaner “bite” to them (and more airy) than traditional. They remind me more of the store-bought treats, where there’s not as much marshmallow “pull” like traditional homemade treats, but they’re not as dense and they taste better than store-bought.
    • Taste: For me, they also have a more creamy flavor than traditional treats with marshmallows.

    I don’t know why I didn’t think to use marshmallow fluff to make rice krispie treats, sooner!

    It was a habit to make classic rice krispie treats using marshmallows, and honestly, I personally prefer a traditional rice krispie treat with marshmallows but let’s face it… I don’t always have marshmallows on hand but I do seem to always have a jar of marshmallow creme in the pantry.

    Want more no bake dessert recipes? I have quite a few to choose from. Start with these rice krispie treats with marshmallow fluff, then try these no-bake cookies (they’re perfect for a really quick dessert), this lemon puppy chow, or this classic caramel corn recipe.

    Baking pan with rice krispie treats inside, with one missing.

    While You’ll Love These Marshmallow Fluff Rice Krispie Treats

    • Easy to Make: Rice Krispie treats are easy to make in general but using marshmallow fluff for these is just as easy!
    • Alternative to Marshmallows: When you don’t have marshmallows on hand, or if you can’t have marshmallows, these rice krispie treats using marshmallow fluff work!
    • Kid-Friendly - It’s great dessert for kids to make since it’s a no-bake recipe, and it only uses a few ingredients.
    • Customizable - You can easily add in your favorite flavors, such as chocolate chips to make chocolate rice krispie treats, sprinkles, cookies for Oreo rice krispy treats, or even flavors like when I made caramel rice krispy treats.

    Ingredients for Rice Krispie Treats with Marshmallow Fluff

    Here’s what you’ll need to make rice krispie treat with marshmallow creme (or fluff):

    The ingredients for making rice krispie treats with marshmallow fluff, sitting on a marble counter.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Unsalted Butter: Butter adds the rich flavors to this no bake treat.
    • Marshmallow Fluff: Rather than using marshmallows, the fluff helps hold the treats together and makes the treats smooth and creamy.
    • Vanilla Extract: Using pure vanilla extract is recommended over immitation. Gives the treats and extra touch of sweetness and a bit of depth.
    • Rice Krispie Cereal: The crispy texture of the treats. You can use any brand of crispy rice cereal or use fruity krispies to make them similar to these Fruity Pebble Treats.

    How to Make Rice Krispie Treats with Marshmallow Fluff

    Prepare a 9 x 13-inch baking dish with parchment paper or cooking spray.

    Melted butter in large saucepan, sitting on marble counter.
    1. Melt: Allow butter to melt in a large pot over medium heat.
    Marshmallow fluff in sauce pan with melted butter, sitting on marble counter.
    2. Add Fluff: When melted, reduce heat, and add marshmallow fluff.
    Melted butter, marshmallow fluff and vanilla extract in saucepan, sitting on marble countertop.
    3. Add Vanilla: Remove from the heat and add vanilla.
    Rice krispies cereal in sauce pan with marshmallow creme, vanilla, and butter.
    4. Add Cereal and Stir: Pour cereal in to marshmallow mixture and stir.
    Rice krispie treat mixture pressed in to 9x13 baking dish, sitting on marble counter.
    5. Pour in Pan and Cool: Press cereal mixture in to baking dish in to an even layer and allow to cool before cutting in to squares. (This could be even up to a 2-3 hours before they’re ready to cut, or they may fall apart.)
    Remove a square from the dish with a spatula, and enjoy!

    Tip: Don't press the mixture too much - Pressing the mixture down in to the pan too much, will make the treats dense instead of light and chewy.

    Recipe Tips

    • Timing: If you don’t have enough time to allow the treats to cool and set, you may prefer rice krispie treats with marshmallows, as those tend to set faster since marshmallows have gelatin in them.
    • Use Fresh Marshmallow Fluff: Older fluff can become hard, or really stiff, so this would make stiff, hard, rice krispie treats.
    • Control the Stickiness: Use wax paper to press the treats down in to the dish, or lightly wet hands with water or nonstick cooking spray before pressing down the treats to prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands.
    • Allow to Fully Cool: Allowing the treats to fully cool will help make sure that the treats don’t fall apart.
    Large, square rice krispie treat sitting on round plate that's on a marble counter top.

    Storage Tips:

    Important: Storing these improperly will cause the treats to dry out and they’ll no longer be soft and chewy.

    Place the marshmallow fluff treats in an airtight container or bag for best results when storing.

    Rice krispie treat pulled apart showing the marshmallow fluff pulling apart.

    More Easy Sweet Treats:

    • Cake mix peanut butter cookies stacked.
      Cake Mix Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Strawberry brownies on white marble cutting board.
      Strawberry Brownies Recipe
    • Vanilla Mug cake recipe on spoon
      The BEST Vanilla Mug Cake Recipe
    • A sweet cheeseball that has bee rolled in colorful M&M's is centered with pretzels and sugar wafer cookies waiting for dipping
      Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball with M&M’s

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use marshmallow fluff instead of marshmallows for rice krispie treats?

    Absolutely. It gives the treats a soft and chewy texture and saves a little time since there’s no need to melt the marshmallows.

    How much marshmallow creme for rice crispy treats?

    Use a 13 ounce container of marshmallow creme for 7 cups of Rice Krispies for Rice Krispie treats.

    What is the secret ingredient in rice krispie treats with marshmallow fluff?

    Pure vanilla extract makes rice krispie treats with marshmallow fluff even more flavorful and adds depth to the flavor

    More No-Bake Recipes

    • Cowboy Pasta Salad in bowl with wooden spoon.
      Cowboy Pasta Salad
    • A slice of strawberry heaven cake dessert on a plate.
      Strawberry Heaven
    • Curry chicken salad with grapes in a white bowl.
      Curry Chicken Salad
    • A slice of caramel cream pie on a round plate, with a fork lying next to it.
      Caramel Cream Pie

    I can’t wait for you to try these marshmallow fluff rice krispie treats! I’d love for you to let me know what you think of this recipe.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Three rice krispie treats made with marshmallow fluff, stacked on top of one another.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Rice Krispie Treats with Marshmallow Fluff

    Rice Krispie Treats with Marshmallow Fluff are easy to make when you don't have, or can't have rice krispie treats made with marshmallows.
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 squares
    Calories 191kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • sauce pan
    • parchment paper
    • 9×13 Baking dish
    • Wooden Spoon
    • wax paper optional for less mess

    Ingredients

    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 13 ounces marshmallow fluff or creme
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • 7 cups rice krispie cereal or your favorite brand

    Instructions

    • Prepare a 9 x 13-inch baking dish with parchment paper or cooking spray.
    • Melt 4 tablespoons of unsalted butter in a large saucepan over medium heat. Once the butter melts, reduce heat to low, add (1) 13-ounce jar of marshmallow fluff, and stir until the mixture is smooth and creamy. (About 2-3.)
    • Remove the mixture from the heat, and stir in 1 teaspoon of pure vanilla extract.
    • Gradually add 7 cups of Rice Krispie cereal to the marshmallow mixture, stirring until all of the cereal is evenly coated with marshmallow.
    • Press the mixture into the prepared baking dish using a piece of wax paper. Let the Rice Krispie treats cool completely before cutting them into squares. (Do note: This can be as much as 2-3 hours or more, as the fluff doesn't "set" the treats as quickly as traditional rice krispie treats.)

    Notes

      • Use Fresh Marshmallow Fluff: Older fluff can become hard, or really stiff, so this would make stiff, hard, rice krispie treats.
      • Control the Stickiness: Use wax paper to press the treats down in to the dish, or lightly wet hands with water before pressing down the treats to prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands.
      • Allow to Fully Cool: Allowing the treats to fully cool will help make sure that the treats don’t fall apart – and this could be a while. Make sure you allow enough time for the treats to set. I find that this takes close to 3 hours, since the fluff takes longer to set than marshmallows.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1square | Calories: 191kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 87mg | Potassium: 22mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 1203IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 5mg

    Wiener Winks

    February 27, 2025

    Wiener Winks baked and resting on parchment-paper-lined baking sheet.

    These Wiener Winks are an easy meal that brings back childhood memories and are a must-try!

    Hot dogs wrapped in buttery toasted bread and a slice of American cheese are baked to crispy perfection. It's a classic, budget-friendly dish that's perfect for busy weeknights, quick lunches, or even a nostalgic snack.

    Golden baked Wiener Winks fresh out of the oven.

    Whether you remember these from school lunches or you're discovering them for the first time, this Wiener Winks recipe is a crowd-pleaser for both kids and adults. Plus, it only requires a few ingredients and comes together in minutes!

    Baking hot dogs in the oven with hot dog buns is another way we enjoy hot dogs at home but sometimes we don’t have buns on hand so making pigs in a blanket with bread, is a fun and delicious way to make them.

    See how to make Wiener Winks step by step, along with tips, and the best dipping sauces, like my hot dog chili sauce, to serve them with, so you can enjoy one of these Vintage Hot Dog Recipes from the 1950s too!

    Why You’ll Love Wiener Winks

    • Kid-Friendly: There’s a reason they serve these hot dog roll-ups in schools. Kids love them because they’re a fun, handheld meal with a crispy, buttery outside and a warm, cheesy hot dog inside.
    • Easy Weeknight Dinner Ideas with Hot Dogs: These are ready in under 30 minutes and great for a busy night or even a quick lunch.
    • Budget-Friendly: Using inexpensive ingredients makes these an affordable meal idea for the family.

    Ingredients and Substitutions

    Here’s what you’ll need to make these baked hot dog and cheese sandwiches.

    Ingredients for wiener winks on wooden cutting board.
    • Hot Dogs: Any type of hot dog will work for this recipe, including all beef, vegetarian, turkey dogs, and more.
    • Sandwich Bread: Classic, white, sliced bread is the traditional type of bread used for wiener winks but you can also use doughs such as biscuit dough or even crescent rolls, like I used in the mini pigs in a blanket.
    • Butter: I find that spreadable butter works best for this recipe, for spreading but you can use softened stick butter as well for a richer taste.
    • Cheese: American cheese is optional but highly recommended to replicate the original wiener wink. You can also use cheddar, pepper jack, Swiss or your favorite shredded cheese.
    • Include clear steps with process photos for each stage.
    • Explain tips for the best results (e.g., pressing the bread flat to make rolling easier).
    • Emphasize the importance of even buttering for a crispy texture.

    How To Make Wiener Winks

    Begin by preheating the oven to 350°F and line a baking sheet (large enough hold the amount of hot dogs you’ll be baking) with parchment paper.

    Slice of bread with wooden rolling pin, flattening out bread.
    1. Take the crust off a slice of sliced white bread and roll the bread flat.
    Butter spread on to slice of bread, with a butter knife resting on bread.
    2. Spread butter on one side of bread.
    Slice of American cheese on bread, and hot dog laying across bread at a diagonal.
    3. Place a slice of cheese and hot dog, diagonally on the plain side of the bread.
    Wrapped hot dog and cheese with buttered bread.
    4. Roll the hot dog and cheese up with the bread and secure with a toothpick.
    Baked wiener winks on parchment-lined baking sheet.
    5. Bake on a parchment paper lined baking sheet for 15-20 minutes until bread is toasted, cheese is melted and hot dogs are heated through.

    Serving Suggestions & Dipping Sauces

    • Great for lunch, snacks, parties, or kid-friendly dinners.
    • Popular dips to serve with wiener winks: ketchup, mustard, chipotle aioli, jalapeno ranch, honey mustard, BBQ sauce, cheese dip.

    Storing Leftover Wiener Winks

    • Store extras in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3 days.
    • For reheating, it’s best to use the air fryer for crispiness and the microwave for quickness. Or, you can place them back in the oven at 350°F for 8-10 minutes, covering with foil if the bread is starting to toast too much before they’re heated through.

    FAQs

    Can I use crescent rolls instead of bread for wiener winks?

    You can, although that’s not the traditional method of making wiener winks. Hawaiian rolls also work for a sweet twist.

    Can I make Wiener Winks ahead of time?

    You can. Assemble the wiener winks up until the point of baking. Then, place them in an airtight container for a few hours until ready to bake.

    How do I make Wiener Winks extra crispy?

    Bake wiener winks on wire racks instead of directly on a baking sheet.

    What to Serve with Hot Dogs with Bread

    Potato chips or French fries are a favorite side dish for hot dogs. You’ll also love these popular side dishes that go well with wiener winks:

    • KFC Coleslaw in small white bowl.
      KFC Coleslaw (Copycat Recipe)
    • A tortilla chip is being dipped into a big bowl of cowboy queso.
      Cowboy Queso
    • Close up of apple pie baked beans in skillet, with wooden spoon.
      Apple Pie Baked Beans
    • Stuffed celery with cream cheese, and everything but the bagel seasoning on top, sitting on white plate.
      Stuffed Celery with Cream Cheese

    Related Recipes

    • hot dog toppings
      Hot Dog Bar Toppings and Ideas for Your Next Party
    • Mini corn dogs in food basket with red and white paper, with a cup of mustard.
      Mini Corn Dogs
    • Hot Dog Week: Buffalo Chicken Dog
      Buffalo Chicken Hot Dog
    • Hand holding breakfast pigs in a blanket
      Breakfast Pigs in a Blanket

    Recipe

    Wiener Winks baked and resting on parchment-paper-lined baking sheet.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Wiener Winks

    Wiener Winks are a nostalgic meal from school lunches, and they're a great meal to make for a quick dinner at home or for a family-friendly snack.
    Course Dinner, Lunch, Main Course, Side Dish, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 292kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • baking sheet
    • toothpicks

    Ingredients

    • 4 slices white sandwich bread
    • 4 hot dogs
    • 4 slices American Cheese
    • 4 teaspoons butter for spreading

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Take the crust off a slice of sliced white bread, and using a rolling pin, roll the piece of bread, flat.
    • Spread butter on one side, enough to cover the slice.
    • Place the buttered side down on to the baking sheet.
    • Place a piece of sliced cheese on the plain side of the bread.
    • Place a hot dog on top of the cheese, diagonally, and roll up, and secure the bread with a toothpick.
    • Continue making the amount of wiener winks desired, by repeating the steps.
    • Bake at 350°F for 15-20 minutes until bread is toasted, the cheese is melted and hot dogs are heated through.

    Video

    Notes

    Add bacon, or sprinkle on seasonings for extra flavor.
    To make crispier wiener winks, you can bake them on wire racks instead of a baking sheet.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1g | Calories: 292kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 810mg | Potassium: 124mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 324IU | Vitamin C: 0.04mg | Calcium: 284mg | Iron: 2mg

    No Bake Energy Balls

    February 24, 2025

    No bake energy balls in small ramekin, sitting on fabric napkin.

    Energy balls are an easy no-bake recipe that is easy to make and a great snack to keep in the refrigerator. They are made of simple ingredients such as peanut butter, oats, honey, mini chocolate chips, a splash of vanilla, and a pinch of salt.

    No bake energy balls in a small ramekin, sitting on fabric napkin.

    I firmly believe that chocolate and peanut butter were meant to be one. They work together in peanut butter chocolate no-bake bars, no-bake chocolate oatmeal cookies, this peanut butter chocolate and toffee cake, and even a peanut butter pie.

    It’s even delicious in these peanut butter chocolate brownies and this peanut butter fluff dip which are fantastic recipes for parties.

    So when the two flavors come together in a snack that you can feel better about eating, it just makes sense to keep the ingredients on hand to make these energy balls.

    Recipe Highlights

    • Great Snack: These energy balls are great for snacking on the road, at sports games, or even after school.
    • Simple Ingredients: The ingredients needed for this recipe are pantry staples and are more than likely on hand and can be made easily.
    • Quick Recipe: With just a 10-minute prep time, these energy bites are ready for chilling, and eating within 30 minutes.

    Ingredients for No-Bake Energy Balls

    Here’s what you’ll need to make the energy balls recipe. The full list of ingredients and instructions can be found in the recipe card below.

    Ingredients on table for a no bake energy balls recipe.

    A few notes about some of the key ingredients:

    • Oats: Old-fashioned oats or quick oats work in this recipe. It just depends on the texture you prefer.
    • Peanut Butter: I prefer using creamy peanut butter for this recipe, although crunchy could work. If you notice that the balls don’t hold together well, it could be due to the nuts, and less of the creamy hold, so adding more peanut butter may work best.
    • Chocolate Chips: Using mini chocolate chips works well for this recipe but regular-size chips can work too, especially if you prefer milk chocolate chips instead of the mini semi-sweet chocolate chips.
    • Salt: A pinch of salt added to sweet ingredients helps balance the sweetness and enhances the flavor.
    • Vanilla Extract: This adds a bit of depth to the recipe and it’s highly recommended, although if you don’t have it on hand, this recipe can still be enjoyed.

    How to Make Energy Balls

    Creamy peanut butter, honey, vanilla, salt and chocolate chips in mixing bowl.
    1. Mix together peanut butter, honey, vanilla, salt, and chocolate chips.
    Oats added in to mixing bowl with peanut butter honey mixture.
    2. Add in the oats and stir to combine. Chill in the refrigerator.
    No bake energy balls on platter.
    3. Form the chilled mixture in to energy balls, and enjoy.

    Recipe Tips:

    How to Shape Mixture in to Energy Balls:

    • use clean hands
    • grab a small amount (what a bite-size would be) of the mixture
    • using your fingertips, gently press the mixture together to adhere the peanut butter to the oats to help secure the ingredients for a better hold
    • place the ball in to the palm of your hands and lightly rotate one hand in a clockwise motion, to form a ball.

    Storing Instructions:

    Store the energy balls in an air-tight container in the refrigerator or freezer so you can grab one as you wish.

    Recipe FAQs:

    Do energy balls really give you energy?

    The peanut butter in the balls give protein and the oats provide carbohydrates which can give a burst of energy. However, if too much sugar is added (i.e. too many chocolate chips) this can provide a quick burst of energy but can lead to a sugar crash later.

    How long can you keep energy balls in the fridge?

    Energy balls are good in the refrigerator for 2 weeks.

    What is a substitute for honey in protein balls?

    Maple syrup, or agave syrup can be substituted for honey in energy balls.

    Hand holding energy ball, next to plate of more energy balls.

    Similar Recipes

    If you love bite-size peanut butter snacks, then make sure to also see how we made cake-mix peanut butter cookies!

    You’ll also love these sweet treats:

    • Peanut Butter Chocolate Chip Cookies
    • Peanut Butter Yogurt Dip
    • Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    No bake energy balls in small ramekin, sitting on fabric napkin.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Energy Balls

    No-bake energy balls are made of oats, peanut butter, honey, vanilla, a pinch of salt and mini chocolate chips.
    Course Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 14 energy balls
    Calories 84kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 1 Mixing bowl
    • 1 spoons
    • plate or baking sheet

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup oats old-fashioned or quick
    • ¼ cup creamy peanut butter or ½ cup for creamier energy balls
    • ¼ cup honey
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ cup mini chocolate chips optional
    • 1 pinch salt

    Instructions

    • In a mixing bowl, mix together the honey, peanut butter, vanilla, salt, and chocolate chips together until combined.
    • Add in the oats and stir to fully combine.
    • Refrigerate the mixture for 30 minutes.
    • Roll the mixture in to small, bite-size balls and enjoy or store in an airtight container in the refrigerator to snack on.

    Video

    Notes

    When rolling the balls:
    • use clean hands
    • grab a small amount (what a bite-size would be) of the mixture
    • using your fingertips, gently press the mixture together to adhere the peanut butter to the oats to help secure the ingredients for a better hold
    • place the ball in to the palm of your hands and lightly rotate one hand in a clockwise motion, to form a ball.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1energy bite | Calories: 84kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 0.5mg | Sodium: 25mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 7IU | Vitamin C: 0.05mg | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    Chicken Caesar Sandwich

    February 23, 2025

    Chicken Caesar Sandwich with bun and lettuce leaf, sitting on round plate.

    Take a delicious bite in to a Chicken Caesar Sandwich that’s filled with fall-apart slow-cooked chicken breast smothered in Caesar dressing along with grated parmesan.

    Pile the shredded Caesar chicken on to a burger bun, top with lettuce, and dinner is served.

    Chicken Caesar Sandwich on a bun with a lettuce leaf.

    I’m showing you how you can make the easiest and most delicious chicken Caesar sandwich recipe in the slow cooker for a hands-off approach, although you can make this with your favorite cooking method.

    You can also serve this shredded chicken open-faced on a piece of toast, wrapped up in a tortilla, or pile it high on a side salad to make this chicken Caesar pasta salad.

    If you love the Caesar flavor in dishes, this Creamy Caesar Chicken has similar flavors.

    Shredded chicken tossed in Caesar dressing, and sprinkled with fresh parsley.

    Chicken Caesar Sandwich Highlights

    • Easy Preparation – Toss the chicken breasts and broth in to a slow cooker and cook. Then mix with the dressing and cheese and dinner is ready!
    • Flexible Cooking Method – Want something faster than using the crockpot? No problem. Boil the chicken breasts, or cook them on the stove, in the oven, or an air fryer. Then follow the remaining steps of this recipe as instructed.
    • Use Other Types of Chicken – This recipe works great with chicken thighs or another type of chicken that’s on hand.
    • Great for Meal Prep – Make this in advance to use on sandwiches, or on salads for the week.

    Caesar Chicken Ingredients

    Here’s what you need to make these easy Caesar Chicken Sandwiches.

    Ingredients for Caesar chicken sandwiches.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Chicken Breasts: The quantity of chicken breasts can vary, depending on the sizes. You’ll need two pounds for this recipe.
    • Chicken Broth: Cooking the chicken in broth gives the chicken more flavor but can be optional, and you can use water if you don’t have broth available. Tip: Homemade chicken broth using a whole chicken or making broth out of a rotisserie chicken is a great way to keep broth on hand for recipes like this one.
    • Parmesan Cheese: Shredded or grated parmesan works for this recipe and shredding or grating your own makes this recipe even better.
    • Fresh Parsley: If you don’t have this on hand, you can still make and enjoy these shredded Caesar chicken sandwiches. The fresh parsley adds color and a touch of freshness that elevates the sandwich.
    • Romaine Lettuce: Romaine offers that crisp texture the tenderness and softness of the chicken and buns. Leaf lettuce will also work but can have more of a bitter taste than romaine.
    • Caesar Dressing: Using storebought dressing is fast and easy but you can also make your own recipe if you have a favorite.
    • Burger Buns: Brioche buns are are delicious with these sandwiches but regular buns or even sesame seed buns are great too.

    How to Make Chicken Caesar Salad Sandwiches

    Chicken breasts sitting in chicken broth inside of crock pot.
    1. Add chicken breasts and broth to crockpot.
    Cooked chicken breast on plate, with fork shredding the chicken.
    2. Shred cooked chicken.
    Shredded chicken in slow cooker, with Caesar dressing poured on top.
    3. Place chicken back in crockpot and add dressing and cook for 30 minutes.
    Caesar dressing mixed in with shredded chicken, with Parmesan cheese and fresh parsley poured on top.
    4. Add cheese and parsley and stir to blend the flavors together.
    Caesar chicken warmed through in the crockpot.
    Buns topped with romaine lettuce and Caesar chicken.
    5. Place romaine leaf on bottom bun.
    Shredded chicken piled on to romaine lettuce and buns.
    6. Place serving of Caesar chicken on top of lettuce leaf.
    Chicken Caesar sandwich built and sitting on plate.
    Place any other additional toppings on, then top with top bun and enjoy.

    Tips:

    • Cook Time: Cook in the crockpot on low for 3-4 hours or on high for 2 hours.
    • Warm or Cold: This chicken filling can be enjoyed both warm and cold.  It is served warm in this recipe but also tastes fantastic cold the next day.
    • Type of Bread: Caesar chicken can be served in croissants or on fresh Italian bread as well.
    • Large Crowd: This recipe can easily be scaled up for a larger number of servings.
    • Additional Flavor: If you love the flavor of garlic, you can add a teaspoon of garlic powder or crushed garlic.

    Storing Tips:

    • Store the chicken Caesar filling in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.  The filled burger buns are best eaten immediately after assembling.
    • The chicken filling is suitable for freezing.  Freeze in an airtight container for up to 3 months.  Thaw in the fridge overnight before using and stir before serving.

    Caesar Sandwich Toppings:

    This shredded chicken Caesar sandwich is delicious served with just a slice of romaine. However, piling on your favorite toppings can also be a great idea.

    A slice of tomato or a sprinkle of salt and pepper is also delicious on this sandwich.

    Add a slice of your favorite cheese, such as American, Swiss, or Pepperjack.

    A slice of red onion, croutons or even potato chips can be a fun crunch.

    What to Serve with a Chicken Caesar Sandwich

    Choose an easy side dish to go along with this easy sandwich recipe.

    • Potato chips with this easy blue cheese dip and this Rotel salsa
    • Old-fashioned pea salad
    • Copycat KFC coleslaw
    • Stuffed celery with cream cheese
    Chicken Caesar sandwich with a bite taken out of it.

    Recipe FAQs

    What ingredients do I need for a Chicken Caesar Sandwich?

    Very little is needed to make this recipe. You’ll need chicken breasts, broth, Caesar salad dressing, Parmesan, and fresh parsley.

    What is the best bread for a Chicken Caesar Sandwich?

    I use hamburger or brioche buns for a chicken Caesar sandwich but you can also use a tortilla, croissant, crackers, or even pile it on sliced bread.

    Can I use rotisserie chicken for a Chicken Caesar Sandwich?

    Absolutely. This cuts down on the cooking time and would make this recipe a lot faster.

    More Chicken Sandwich Recipes

    • Chicken bacon ranch sandwich on white plate.
      Chicken Bacon Ranch Sandwich Recipe
    • Chicken Grilled Cheese Sandwich
      Chicken Grilled Cheese
    • Chicken club sandwich in platter next to french fries.
      Chicken Club Sandwich
    • Chicken Caprese Sandwich on white plate.
      Chicken Caprese Sandwich

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chicken Caesar Sandwich with bun and lettuce leaf, sitting on round plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Chicken Caesar Sandwich

    Slow cooked Chicken Caesar Sandwich made of shredded chicken tossed in Caesar dressing, Parmesan cheese, and fresh parsley, served on burger buns.
    Course Dinner, Lunch, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 hours hours 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 3 hours hours 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 sandwiches
    Calories 543kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • slow cooker
    • 2 forks for shredding

    Ingredients

    • 2 pounds chicken breast
    • 2 cups chicken broth homemade chicken broth recipe
    • 1 cup Caesar salad dressing
    • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated or shredded
    • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves finely chopped
    • 6 burger buns
    • Romaine lettuce leaves optional for topping

    Instructions

    • Add the whole chicken breasts to the slow cooker bowl along with the chicken broth.  Slow cook on low for 3 – 4 hours or high for 2 hours.
    • Remove the chicken breasts from the slow cooker and shred using 2 forks.  Drain the chicken broth from the slow cooker and discard.
    • Return the shredded chicken to the slow cooker along with the caesar salad dressing.  Stir to combine and slow cook for a further 30 minutes.  Stir through the parmesan cheese and finely chopped parsley.
    • Fill the burger buns with the romaine lettuce leaves and warm chicken caesar filling.

    Video

    Notes

    • This chicken filling can be enjoyed both warm and cold.  It is served warm in this recipe but also tastes fantastic cold the next day.
    • Caesar chicken can be served in croissants or on fresh Italian bread as well.
    • This recipe can easily be scaled up for a larger number of servings.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 543kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 119mg | Sodium: 1287mg | Potassium: 659mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 336IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 194mg | Iron: 3mg

    Leprechaun Bait

    February 21, 2025

    Leprechaun Bait in round bowl, sitting on yellow napkin.

    Leprechaun Bait: If you’re looking for fun snacks for St. Patrick’s Day for your little leprechauns, this leprechaun bait (aka leprechaun chow) is it! Your whole family will love this mix of white chocolate, cereal, sprinkles, and M&Ms!

    Leprechaun Bait

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    I’m not sure about your house, but in our house, we make “leprechaun traps” in March. It’s a fun craft activity and the kids get really excited about it.

    As we all know, the only thing leprechauns love more than shiny gold coins is tasty treats! (Especially when those shiny gold coins are on a St. Patrick’s Day charcuterie board!)

    So of course we had to come up with a fun treat; leprechaun bait (or in other words, a St. Patrick’s Day snack mix!) It’s similar to our other snack mix recipes, like our Bunny Bait and our Christmas Chex Mix!

    Whether you use this leprechaun bait for your craft or as St. Patrick’s Day party food, it’s sure to be a hit with everyone! The crunchy cereal and the sweet chocolate mixture are a little bit addictive and such a great treat (just like our white chocolate lemon puppy chow, oh gosh). You’ve been warned!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients for Leprechaun Bait

    You can get everything you’ll need to make this leprechaun bait at your local grocery store. You know us, we like recipes with simple ingredients that can be made quickly and easily (because it doesn’t have to be difficult to be delicious)!

    • 1½ cups white chocolate chips – we prefer Ghirardelli
    • 3 cups rice Chex cereal – can use corn Chex, but rice is preferred
    • 1 cup Kashi honey toasted oat cereal – can use Cheerios, too
    • 1 cup green M&Ms
    • ¼ cup green & white sprinkles
    • green cookie icing if desired
    Ingredients for leprechaun bait.

    Substitutions

    I know that sometimes it can be hard to find the exact type of ingredients used in a recipe. Just know that you can mix things up to fit what you have on hand or to match the flavors you prefer!

    This leprechaun mix recipe is very forgiving, so feel free to substitute items to make it your own! For instance:

    • Corn Chex instead of Rice Chex
    • Cheerios instead of Kashi cereal
    • Different green candies
    • White baking discs or almond bark instead of Ghirardelli white chocolate chips
    • Add in Lucky Charms marshmallows
    • You can use wax paper instead of parchment paper

    Variations

    If you love the look and sound of this mix but want to change it up to fit the holiday you're making it for, head to the store and see if you can find candies/cookies/snacks in the color you're aiming for. For instance, pink candies for Valentine’s Day, red and green for Christmas, etc.

    How to Make This Quick & Easy Leprechaun Bait

    1. First, thinking ahead, grab a large baking sheet and cover it completely with parchment paper.
    2. Next, melt the chocolate baking chips in a large bowl (large enough that the cereal will fit in it after the chocolate is melted) following the package directions for melting. (Most will be to melt on half-power for 2 minutes, stirring every 30 seconds. Do NOT overcook.)
    3. Once the chocolate is completely melted, pour your dry cereal in to the bowl of white chocolate and carefully stir to mix, trying to make sure all of the cereal becomes covered.
    A bowl of cereal about to be poured into a bowl of melted white chocolate.
    Melt chocolate.
    The bowl of melted chocolate with the cereal on top of it.
    Add cereal.
    1. Next, pour in half of the sprinkles, and stir.
    Sprinkles added into the bowl of chocolate and cereal.
    Add sprinkles.
    1. Once mixed, pour out your chocolate-covered cereal on to the parchment paper and spread it out so most of it is in a single layer. (It’s ok if some of it’s still touching - you’ll be breaking it up in to small pieces anyway once it’s hardened.)
    The leprechaun bait mixture spread out onto a lined baking sheet.
    Spread on baking sheet.
    1. Sprinkle the remaining sprinkles on top of the cereal before the chocolate hardens, and then drizzle it with as much green cookie icing as you like.
    2. Allow cereal/icing to “dry” (about 20 minutes – the icing is what takes longer to dry) and then break up the cereal in to small bite-size pieces. (Remember, this is a snack mix so it’s ok if some of cereal is stuck together but large pieces are harder to eat when snacking.)
    Green and white sprinkles about to be poured onto the chocolate and cereal mixture.
    Add remaining sprinkles.
    Cookie icing being drizzled on the leprechaun bait that is spread on the parchment paper.
    Drizzle cookie icing.
    1. Next, it’s time to add in the M&M’s and mix all together! You can either mix it all together in the large bowl or you can pour the M&M’s on top of the broken pieces of cereal and mix it with your hands. 
    A bowl of green M&Ms about to be sprinkled on the leprechaun bait that is spread on the parchment paper.
    Add remaining sprinkles.
    1. Serve and enjoy!
    A big bowl of leprechaun bait with a small bowl of it next to it.
    Leprechaun Bait

    Storage

    Store this leprechaun bait recipe in an airtight container or bag at room temperature and it should stay good for up to a week (unless the sneaky leprechauns get it first).

    Or, if you want to bag some up in cellophane bags for fun St. Patrick's Day gifts and share some yummy treats with classmates or neighbors, that would be an amazing idea, too!

    Leprechaun bait.
    Leprechaun Bait

    Expert Tips and FAQs

    What are some other green snacks I could serve besides leprechaun bait?

    For St. Patrick’s Day, green party food is always a hit!

    Think green punch (by mixing green Kool-aid with ginger ale), green vegetables, green pinwheels (using spinach wraps), Lucky Charms Rice Krispie Treats, Lucky Charms blondies, mint brownies…

    What do you serve at a St. Patrick’s Day party?

    Typically the menu at St. Patrick’s Day is “Irish” (or some variation of it). This usually means serving things like corned beef and cabbage, Irish potato candy, potato soup (we’ve got a really easy potato soup recipe you could use), and for the grown-ups maybe a green Guinness!

    St. Patrick's Day Snack Mix in White Bowl
    St. Patrick’s Day Snack Mix

    Related Recipes

    Are you looking for more recipes and ideas to make your St. Patrick’s Day extra special? Why not start your day off with these Lucky Charms pancakes or these chocolate mint cupcakes, and maybe whip up some Lucky Charms blondies for an afternoon snack?

    Recipe

    Leprechaun Bait in round bowl, sitting on yellow napkin.
    Print Pin
    5 from 9 votes

    Leprechaun Bait

    Leprechaun Bait: If you're looking for fun snacks for St. Patrick's Day, this leprechaun bait (aka leprechaun chow) is it! Your whole family will love this mix of white chocolate, cereal, sprinkles and M&Ms!
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 minutes minutes
    Drying Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 27 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 268kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1½ cups white chocolate chips we prefer Ghirardelli (see substitutions for other suggestions)
    • 3 cups rice Chex cereal can use corn Chex, but rice is preferred
    • 1 cup Kashi honey toasted oat cereal can use cheerios too
    • 1 cup green M&Ms
    • ¼ cup green & white sprinkles
    • green cookie icing if desired

    Instructions

    • First, thinking ahead, grab a large baking sheet and cover it completely with parchment paper.
    • Next, melt the chocolate baking chips in a large bowl (large enough that the cereal will fit in it after the chocolate is melted) following the package directions for melting. (Most will be to melt on half-power for 2 minutes, stirring every 30 seconds. Do NOT overcook.)
    • Once the chocolate is completely melted, pour your dry cereal in to the bowl of white chocolate and carefully stir to mix, trying to make sure all of the cereal becomes covered.
    • Next, pour in half of the sprinkles, and stir.
    • Once mixed, pour out your chocolate covered cereal on to the parchment paper and spread it out so most of it is in a single layer. (It's ok if some of it's still touching - you'll be breaking it up in to small pieces anyway once it's hardened.)
    • Sprinkle the reamaining sprinkles on the top of the cereal before the chocolate hardens and then drizzle it with as much green cookie icing as you'd like.
    • Allow cereal/icing to "dry" (about 20 minutes – the icing is what takes longer to dry) and then break up the cereal in to small bite-size pieces. (Remember, this is a snack mix so it's ok if some of cereal is stuck together but large pieces are harder to eat when snacking.)
    • Next, it's time to add in the M&M's and mix all together! You can either mix it all together in the large bowl or you can pour the M&M's on top of the broken pieces of cereal and mix it with your hands.
    • Serve and enjoy!

    Notes

    Make sure the mix is fully cooled before storing or the chocolate could “sweat” and cause the mix to be soggy.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 268kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 129mg | Potassium: 133mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 268IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 6mg

    Crispy Air Fryer Tofu Recipe

    February 9, 2025

    Two pieces of air fryer tofu on a toothpick.

    This crispy air fryer tofu is a great recipe to serve as an appetizer at a party or just to make on a weeknight at home, and can also be made vegan and gluten-free!

    Cooking it in the air fryer allows the excess moisture and fats to drip down below to retain a crispy texture.

    Air Fryer Tofu Recipe with a dipping sauce

    With only 5 simple ingredients, this easy air fryer tofu has a cooking time of only 12 minutes and can be served with dipping sauces such as soy sauce, ranch dressing (like our jalapeno ranch) BBQ sauce, chipotle mayo or your favorite sauce!

    Can you cook tofu in the air fryer?

    Yes! The next time you’re craving a crispy tofu, the air-fryer is a great option. It’s quick and gives that “fried” flavor you’re looking for, without the mess of vegetable oil splattering everywhere!

    How long should you air fry tofu?

    With the instructions below, using flour, salt, pepper, and egg, cook the tofu at 350 degrees for 12 minutes or until golden brown.

    How do you make tofu crispy?

    • Gently press the tofu between paper towels to remove excess water. A great way to do this is to line two plates with paper towels and place the tofu on one of them.

      Top the tofu with the other paper-towel covered plate, (paper towel side down) and find a heavy object (like a can of vegetables) that can sit on top to gently press down on the tofu. The paper towels should “sandwich” the tofu and soak up the water. You may also consider a tofu press to make this job a little easier.
    • The air fryer cooks the tofu by circulating hot air around it, while also keeping it separated from the fats and excess water that it would normally be sitting in. So this will help get healthy, crispy tofu that is evenly cooked in just 12 minutes!
    Air fryer tofu on toothpicks, perfect as an appetizer

    How to Season Tofu

    This recipe makes perfect classic breaded tofu, but if you’re looking to change things up you can add your favorite spices into flour.

    To make the tofu spicy, try some onion powder, cayenne pepper and smoky paprika to the flour mixture.

    If you want to make it a little more savory, add some Italian seasoning, garlic powder, or Cavenders to the flour.

    This recipe is very forgiving and is a great base for experimenting in the kitchen.

    How to Cook Tofu in the Air Fryer

    It is incredibly easy and you only need a few ingredients to make crispy tofu in the air fryer.

    Air fryer tofu ingredients on white counter

    Key Ingredients

    • 3 – 12.3 oz. packages of firm (or extra firm) tofu – don’t skip drying the tofu before cooking!
    • 1⁄2 cup flour – all-purpose flour

    See the full list of ingredients and instructions in the recipe card below.

    How to Cook Air Fryer Tofu

    STEP 1: Start by preparing the tofu for cooking.

    TIP: Remember, gently press the tofu between paper towels to remove excess water. A great way to do this is to line two plates with paper towels, and place the tofu on one of them.
    Top the tofu with the other paper-towel-covered plate, (paper towel side down) and find a heavy object (like a can of vegetables) that can sit on top to gently press down on the tofu. The paper towels should “sandwich” the tofu and soak up the water.

    Cube tofu in to squares

    STEP 3: Cut the block of tofu into 12, even (bite-size) pieces. (For best results, try and make the cubes the same size so they cook evenly.)

    STEP 4: Next, in a small bowl, mix together the flour, salt and pepper.

    Breading the tofu for the air fryer

    STEP 5: Dip each piece of tofu in the flour mixture. (This will give the egg something to cling to.)

    Egg wash on tofu for air fryer

    STEP 6: Finally, dip or brush each piece with beaten eggs which will give it a crunchy golden crust for the crispiest tofu!

    tofu in the air fryer

    STEP 7: Place the tofu in a single layer in the air fryer basket.

    You may need to make multiple batches, depending on the size of your air fryer basket.

    Cook at 350 degrees for 12 minutes.

    Air Fryer tofu on a white platter

    Make it Gluten-Free

    You can easily make this recipe gluten-free by using your favorite gluten-free flour. However, I find that an all-purpose, gluten-free mixture works best because they contain a blend of flours.

    breaded fried tofu inside

    Make it Vegan

    There are two ways to make vegan tofu in the air fryer.

    1. One way is to roll the tofu cubes in panko crumbs and skip the egg drizzle! The panko crumbs will still turn brown and crunchy.
      NOTE: If you try to use flour without the eggs, you will wind up with white dusted tofu cubes. So skip the eggs and swap the flour for panko instead.
    2. The second way to make vegan tofu in the air fryer is to completely omit the eggs and breading.
      You can flavor the tofu cubes by marinating them in your favorite sauces or tossing them in seasonings and spices.
      Still cook them at 350 degrees for 12 minutes!
    Air Fryer Tofu recipe with dipping sauce

    How to Serve Air Fryer Tofu

    You can either eat by itself, as a great appetizer (with a sauce, see below for ideas) or even as a side dish, like you would french fries.

    However, some of the favorite ways to serve air-fried tofu, is with stir-fry or even brown rice.

    Dipping Sauces for Air Fried Tofu

    Totally optional of course, but you can serve your favorite sauces alongside this fried tofu. Sauces such as:

    • soy sauce (adding sesame seeds is fun too)
    • fish sauce
    • coconut aminos
    • sweet chili
    • bbq sauce
    • ranch dressing

    How to Store Leftover Air Fryer Tofu

    Breaded tofu is best enjoyed immediately after cooking it. But if you do have leftovers you can store it covered in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

    The breading will likely become soft, so I recommend reheating it in the air fryer again to bring back some of the crispy breading.

    Dipping air fryer tofu in sauce

    More Air Fryer Recipes

    If you love air fryer recipes, then you’ll also love these easy recipes:

    • Air Fryer Eggplant Fries
    • Air Fryer Zucchini
    • Butternut Squash in the Air Fryer
    • Apple Chips in the Air Fryer

    Recipe

    Two pieces of air fryer tofu on a toothpick.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Crispy Air Fryer Tofu

    This crispy air fryer tofu is a great recipe to serve as an appetizer at a party or just to make on a weeknight at home, and can also be made vegan and gluten-free!
    Course Appetizer, Main Course
    Cuisine Asian
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes minutes
    Total Time 17 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 59kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • air fryer

    Ingredients

    • 3 – 12.3 oz. packages of firm tofu
    • ½ cup flour
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon pepper
    • 2 eggs
    • green onion chopped, if desired

    Instructions

    • Carefully remove the tofu from the packaging and cut evenly into 12 cubes. See blog post for tips on how to remove excess water, to help get a crispy crust.
    • Mix together the flour, salt and pepper then dip each cube in the mixture. Be sure to cover each side.
    • Brush, drizzle or dip the beaten eggs over each cube.
    • Place the tofu in the air fryer basket, in a single layer, spacing them evenly apart. You may need to make multiple batches, depending on the size of your basket.
    • Cook at 350 degrees for 12 minutes.
    • Serve with your choice of dipping sauce and garnish with green onion if desired.

    Notes

    For crispy tofu: It’s an extra step but if you have time and want to, gently press the tofu between paper towels to remove excess water. A great way to do this is to line two plates with paper towels, and place the tofu on one of them.
    Top the tofu with the other paper-towel covered plate, (paper towel side down) and find something (like a can of vegetables) that can sit on top to gently press down on the tofu. The paper towels should “sandwich” the tofu and soak up the water.
    Leftovers: Breaded tofu is best enjoyed immediately after cooking it. But if you do have leftovers you can store it covered in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 3 days. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 59kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 118mg | Potassium: 31mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 79IU | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 1mg

    Asian Sloppy Joes

    February 8, 2025

    Asian Sloppy Joe sandwich on round plate.

    Asian Sloppy Joes are a teriyaki-flavored twist on the classic homemade Sloppy Joe recipe, with sweet and tangy flavors instead of the traditional tomato-based sauce. You’ll love how this Korean sloppy joe dinner recipe is ready in under 30 minutes.

    Asian sloppy joes on a bun, sitting on a round plate.

    Hearty sandwich recipes can be such a great fit for dinner. They can be easy to make, use simple ingredients, and are ready fast! So when the family is hungry, a simple sandwich recipe is a great choice.

    Rotating dinner sandwiches like this Maid-Rite recipe, and my Sloppy Joe Sliders with this sweet sloppy joe recipe, is a great way to meal plan dinner ideas by keeping the common ingredients on hand to make them a few times a month.

    If you love the flavors in this Asian-inspired dish, try my Asian chicken lettuce wraps too. Or, if you’re a fan of wontons, this Avocado Wonton recipe definitely hits the spot.

    Teriyaki Sloppy Joes Recipe Highlights

    • Delicious Flavors – The rich sauce is a sweet and salty flavor that’s similar to the flavors of my delicious homemade teriyaki sauce.
    • Variations – This recipe is easy to switch out the protein if desired. Ground chicken, pork, veal, turkey, or even plant-based protein can be used in this recipe.
    • Serving Options – Serve this version of sloppy joes on buns for a traditional method, on Texas Toast, in a tortilla, in a bowl on top of a lettuce salad, or with rice.

    Asian Sloppy Joe Ingredients

    Here’s what you’ll need to make these teriyaki-flavored sloppy joes.

    Ingredients sitting on counter to make Asian sloppy joes.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Ground beef: Ground chuck provides a hearty base for the sloppy joe mixture. The fat content helps bind the flavors. You can substitute the beef with an equal amount of ground chicken, turkey, or plant-based crumbles.
    • Hoisin sauce: Adds a sweet, tangy, and savory depth to the sauce, giving the dish an Asian-inspired flavor.
    • Soy sauce: Introduces umami and saltiness to the dish. Use low-sodium soy sauce to control salt levels. 
    • Honey: Adds sweetness that balances the savory and spicy elements. You can substitute the honey with an equal amount of maple syrup or brown sugar.
    • Rice vinegar: Provides acidity, which brightens and balances the richness of the meat mixture. You can substitute the rice vinegar with apple cider or white vinegar.
    • Sesame oil: Adds a nutty, toasted flavor that complements the Asian profile of the dish.
    • Garlic powder: Provides a subtle garlic flavor that blends smoothly into the sauce. You can substitute garlic powder with fresh minced garlic.
    • Fresh ginger: Adds a spicy warmth and aromatic flavor that enhances the dish's freshness. Grate the ginger finely for better integration. 
    • Sriracha sauce: Brings heat and a slight garlicky tang to the sloppy joe mixture. 
    • Cornstarch: Thickens the sauce, giving the sloppy joes a rich, velvety texture. Dissolving cornstarch in cold water before adding it to the mixture helps to avoid lumps. 
    • Sesame seeds: Provides a slight crunch and nutty flavor, enhancing the presentation. 

    How to Make Asian Sloppy Joes

    Full instructions, with more details can be found in the recipe card below.

    Ground beef browned and cooked in a skillet.
    1. Brown the ground beef in a skillet.
    Sauces and seasonings in mixing bowl.
    2. Mix together soy sauce, hoisin, honey, rice vinegar, ginger, sriracha, sesame oil, and garlic powder.
    Cornstarch added to warmed sauces in skillet to thicken.
    3. Add water and cornstarch to thicken.
    Cooked ground beef added back in to skillet with sauce.
    4. Add cooked ground beef to sauce mixture.
    Asian Sloppy Joes stacked on bottom bun, sitting on a plate.
    5. The Asian Sloppy Joes are ready to pile on to a bun.

    Pro Tips

    • For a lighter option, use ground chicken or turkey.
    • Peeling ginger: Always peel the ginger with a spoon or knife before grating to remove the tough outer skin. 
    • Toast buns: If you prefer, toast the sandwich buns until golden before serving.
    • More texture: For added texture, you can include shredded carrots or cabbage.
    • Add spice: You can increase the heat by adding an additional tablespoon of sriracha sauce to the sauce mixture.
    Asian Sloppy Joe sandwiches made, and placed on a round plate.

    What to Serve with Korean Sloppy Joes

    • Baked Potato Wedges: These can be baked in the oven while the sloppy joes are cooking on the stovetop.
    • For something a little lighter, this Italian cucumber salad recipe is refreshing and cold, that compliments the heavier, warm, sandwich.
    • This broccoli crunch salad has a creamy, cool, sauce that also has a crunchy texture that pairs well with the soft meaty texture of the sandwich.
    • A fried southern treat, these fried pickle slices are tangy and fun to pop in your mouth alongside any sandwich.

    FAQs

    What are Asian Sloppy Joes?

    Similar to the classic sloppy joes, Asian sloppy joes have a sweet and tangy, teriyaki-type sauce instead of a tomato-based sauce.

    What kind of meat works best for Asian Sloppy Joes?

    Ground beef if recommended but this can easily be substituted with ground chicken or ground turkey, or even a plant-based protein.

    Can I make this Asain Sloppy Joe recipe vegetarian or vegan?

    Absolutely. Substitute ground beef for plant-based meat.

    Storage Instructions

    1. Store any leftover sloppy joe mixture in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
    2. Reheat in a skillet over medium heat or in the microwave before serving.

    Other Dinner Recipes You’ll Love

    If you’re a fan of easy, hearty dinner recipes like this one, you’ll also love these reader favorites:

    • Old-Fashioned Dinner Recipes collage.
      19 Old-Fashioned Dinner Recipes (Classic Comfort Food Favorites)
    • bratwursts on bun with toppings
      How to Cook Brats in the Oven
    • Mac and Cheese with Ham in bowl.
      Mac and Cheese with Ham
    • A pan full of beanie weenies with a wooden spoon dishing out a serving.
      Beanie Weenies Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Asian Sloppy Joe sandwich on round plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Asian Sloppy Joes

    These Asian Sloppy Joes are a teriyaki-sauce-based version of the classic recipe, using simple ingredients that give it a sweet and tangy flavor, and are ready in under 30 minutes.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Asian
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 sandwiches
    Calories 548kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 16 ounces ground beef
    • ½ cup hoisin sauce
    • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
    • 1 tablespoon honey
    • 1 tablespoon rice vinegar
    • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
    • 1 tablespoon sriracha sauce
    • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon water
    • 1 teaspoon cornstarch
    • 4 sandwich buns or slider buns for smaller portions
    • ¼ cup green onions chopped for garnish
    • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds optional garnish

    Instructions

    • Heat a large skillet over medium heat. Add 16 ounces of ground beef and cook, breaking it up with a meat chopper or wooden spoon, until browned and fully cooked about 8 minutes. Drain the excess fat and place the cooked meat into a bowl. Set the hot skillet aside. 
    • In a small mixing bowl, whisk together ½ cup hoisin sauce, 2 tablespoons soy sauce, 1 tablespoon honey, 1 tablespoon rice vinegar, 1 tablespoon fresh grated ginger, 1 tablespoon sriracha, 1 teaspoon sesame oil, and 1 teaspoon garlic powder until combined. Then, add the sauce mixture back into the pan and begin to simmer the sauce over medium-high heat.
    • In a small bowl, whisk together 1 teaspoon water and 1 teaspoon cornstarch until combined. Add the slurry to the warmed sauce mixture.
    • Return the browned ground beef to the skillet with the sauce, stirring to coat evenly. Simmer for about 10 minutes until everything is heated through.
    • Toast the sandwich buns until golden. Spoon the sloppy joe mixture onto each bun.
    • Sprinkle with sesame seeds and garnish with chopped green onions. Serve immediately and enjoy!

    Notes

    • Toast buns: If you prefer, toast the sandwich buns until golden before serving.
    • More texture: For added texture, you can include shredded carrots or cabbage.
    • Add spice: You can increase the heat by adding an additional tablespoon of sriracha sauce to the sauce mixture.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 548kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 78mg | Sodium: 1533mg | Potassium: 516mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 129mg | Iron: 6mg

    Meatball Stuffed Bell Peppers

    February 7, 2025

    Bell peppers stuffed with meatballs and rice.

    I’m not sure you’ll find an easy weeknight dinner as easy as this one. This Meatball Stuffed Bell Pepper recipe combines frozen meatballs, a package of seasoned rice, bell peppers, and cheese. That’s it!

    Easy Meatball Stuffed Peppers - beef meatballs, cheese, rice... it's so quick and easy!

    Dinner Ideas for Family

    One of my favorite things to do is to turn one of our favorite dishes into a slightly homemade recipe, making it faster, easier, and of course…delicious. So when I began brainstorming the other day about what dinners I could have at my fingertips for the busy weeknights, stuffed peppers came to mind. Then, I came up with a quick solution for one of our favorites.

    “Meatballs! Why couldn’t I use meatballs to make a stuffed pepper recipe even easier!” So I did. This meatball casserole also uses meatballs that transform an everyday pasta casserole into a hearty and satisfying meal.

    Easy Dinner Recipes

    If you love 30-minute or less dinners or just easy dinner recipes like this one, some of your favorites will also be:

    • BBQ Baked Pork Chops – Ready in 30 minutes and using just a handful of ingredients, this dinner is a favorite for my family and I know it will be for yours too.
    • Burgers in the Oven – The most popular dinner recipe on my blog, all because of one little trick that makes these the best burgers.
    • Italian Sausages in the Oven – Simply bake the sausages and let everyone enjoy them as they wish; either on a bun, sliced to dip in sauce, or served with onions and sauerkraut.

    How to Make This Easy Dinner Recipe

    Ingredients for one of our family favorite weeknight meals. Easy Meatball Stuffed Peppers - beef meatballs, cheese, rice... it's so quick and easy!

    All you need is the following… (but make sure to see the recipe card below for exact amounts and instructions).

    • Bell Peppers: You can choose any color that you like. I prefer to use a mixture of colors to add different flavor variations and the presentation is beautiful.
    • Meatballs: You can make meatballs from scratch but using frozen meatballs make this a quick dinner recipe with very little prep. I’ve even loved cooking frozen meatballs in the Instant Pot. You could also spice things up and make these Chicken Fire Cracker Meatballs.
    • Cheese: Storebought shredded cheese helps keep this recipe fast but shredding your own cheese can give the recipe an even better result since the cheese will melt smoother and be more delicious. Types of cheeses you can use are shredded cheddar, shredded fiesta, or your favorite blend.
    • Rice: When I have time, I love making cheesy rice for this recipe but if in a time crunch, using a package of Spanish rice is my go-to solution. You can also do packaged cheesy rice, or your favorite flavor to mix things up.

    Meatball Stuffed Peppers

    Begin by making the rice, according to the recipe you’re using or the package directions.

    Easy stuffed bell peppers recipe - using meatballs and a rice packet make these the perfect easy weeknight meal

    Next, cook meatballs according to your favorite recipe or the package directions.

    Tip: While the meatballs and rice are cooking, this is a great time to also prep your bell peppers by washing them, slicing the tops off, and removing the membranes and seeds.

    Beef meatballs mixed with rice and cheese for a stuffed bell peppers recipe

    Combine the cooked rice, cooked meatballs, and ½ cup of shredded cheese.

    Stuffed Peppers Recipe - mix cooked meatballs, rice and cheese together and stuff the bell peppers and bake! Yum! So easy and quick too.

    Begin filling the bell pepper cavities with the rice, cheese and meatball mixture until it reaches the top.

    Stuffed peppers recipe - using bell peppers and beef meatballs.

    Place the stuffed peppers in a baking dish or oven-safe pan.

    Stuffed peppers recipe, using bell peppers and baking in a cast iron pan. Cheese, rice and meatballs.

    Sprinkle the remaining cheese on top of the stuffed bell peppers.

    Melt cheese over the top of bell peppers - stuffed peppers recipe

    Bake in the oven at 350°F for 25-30 minutes.

    Mmm! Stuffed peppers recipe - using beef meatballs, spanish rice and shredded cheese. This made this super easy and quick to put together.

    While these baked, the smell of all the flavors coming together made me so hungry that I nearly reached in to sneak a meatball to hold me over.

    Stuffed bell pepper recipe - using frozen meatballs and rice with cheese for a delicious weeknight meal.

    How to Serve Stuffed Bell Peppers

    This is the type of recipe that can be served alone since it’s so filling but it also pairs with a side salad recipe, cream cheese corn dip and chips, or something light like stuffed celery.

    Stuffed bell pepper recipe - using meatballs to make it super easy

    How Store Meatball Stuffed Peppers

    If you have leftover stuffed peppers, once they’re cooled, store them in an airtight container for up to 3-4 days.

    Reheat the stuffed peppers in the microwave or in the oven, until heated through. Tip: If baking to reheat, it may be best to cover them with aluminum foil.

    More Easy Dinner Recipes

    Make sure you also try these popular easy dinner recipes that the family will love.

    • Blue cheese burger on pretzel bun, with lettuce leaf, sitting next to french fries on plate.
      Blue Cheese Burgers
    • buffalo chicken soup in white bowl with green onions and chips
      Buffalo Chicken Soup Recipe
    • Chicken and noodles in a white bowl with fork holding a bite.
      Chicken and Noodles Recipe
    • Noodle Bowl - Vegan Recipe & Veggies
      Noodle Bowl – Easy, Vegan, Gluten Free

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Bell peppers stuffed with meatballs and rice.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Meatball Stuffed Bell Peppers Recipe

    Meatball Stuffed Peppers only takes a few ingredients to whip up this easy recipe! Perfect for weeknight dinners, this is great for the entire family.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 stuffed peppers
    Calories 386kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 14 ounce bag Frozen Meatballs
    • 5.6 ounce Flavored Rice Packet prepared – we used Spanish rice flavor
    • 1 cup Shredded Cheese divided
    • 6 bell peppers any assorted color

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • Frozen meatballs, cooked according to package directions.
    • Combine prepared rice, meatballs, and ½ cup of shredded cheese in a mixing bowl.
    • Cut the tops off of each pepper, and remove cores and seeds.
    • In a baking dish, line up the peppers with cavities facing up.
    • Begin spooning equivalent amounts of the meatball and rice mixture in to each pepper.
    • Sprinkle tops of peppers with remaining shredded cheese.
    • Bake 25-30 minutes or until heated through.

    Notes

    If you have a few more minutes, you can make this cheesy rice recipe instead of using packaged rice for the best flavor.
    You can also add a little spaghetti sauce in the rice and meatball mixture for extra flavor, and smoother texture.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1stuffed pepper | Calories: 386kcal | Carbohydrates: 69g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 128mg | Potassium: 367mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3850IU | Vitamin C: 152mg | Calcium: 124mg | Iron: 1.3mg

    Lemon Blondies

    February 6, 2025

    Three lemon blondies stacked on top of one another on a piece of parchment paper.

    These delicious Lemon Blondies are full of lemon flavor and topped with a simple, lemony glaze.

    Using simple, everyday ingredients, these blondies are a made-from-scratch recipe that’s easy to make.

    Stacked lemon blondies on a round plate.

    I love lemon desserts, which is why I made lemon brownies with a cake mix first, and now, this homemade lemon blondie recipe is another option for making a delicious handheld lemon dessert with a slight twist in texture.

    If making desserts from scratch and keeping things easy in the kitchen is important to you, then this is a recipe to save to your Pinterest boards. This blondie recipe is a soft, chewy dessert that’s perfect for a spring dessert and to take along to potlucks or even Easter dinner.

    Here, you'll find the full lemon blondie recipe, complete with photos, instructions, and all of my best blondie recipe tips and tricks!

    Looking for more blondie recipes? This butterscotch brownie recipe is a similar type of dessert that’s an alternative to a chocolate brownie.

    Lemon blondie on round plate, with a bite taken out of it.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Simple Recipe - It's very likely that you already have these simple ingredients in your pantry and fridge, and you'll be amazed at how quickly the lemon blondie mixture comes together.
    • Perfect for Sharing - This recipe makes 9 bigger blondies, or 12 smaller blondies, making it easy to make for a party, sharing at work, or selling at a bake sale. This is one of those desserts that travels well and works great for potlucks. You can find more potluck desserts here.
    • Sweet & Tangy Flavors - The rich, buttery-sweet texture of blondies pairs wonderfully with the refreshing tartness of lemon.
    • Soft & Chewy Texture - Unlike lemon bars, which are more custard-like, lemon blondies have a dense, fudgy texture similar to brownies.
    • Customize - You can add fun additions like white chocolate chips, a lemon glaze, or even shredded coconut.

    Ingredients

    Here’s what you’ll need to make this easy blondies recipe.

    Ingredients for lemon blondies.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Granulated sugar: Adds sweetness and structure to the blondies. 
    • Lemon zest and juice: Provides the signature tangy lemon flavor. Always use fresh lemons for the best results. Get a few extra lemons to make this lemon lush next.
    • Pure vanilla extract: This recipe uses vanilla to balance the tanginess and round out the flavor profile.
    • Unsalted butter: Gives the blondies their moist and rich texture.
    • Eggs: Bind the ingredients together and contribute to the blondies' structure.
    • Kosher salt: Enhances the flavors and balances the sweetness.
    • All-purpose flour: Flour provides the needed structure for these blondies.
    • Powdered sugar: Used for the glaze to create a smooth and sweet finish.

    How to Make Lemon Blondies

    Full instructions, with more details can be found in the recipe card below.

    Start by preheating your oven to 350°F. Lightly spray an 8 x 8-inch baking dish with cooking spray, then line it with parchment paper, leaving an overhang for easy removal. The spray will help keep the parchment in place.

    Lemon zest and sugar in clear, glass, mixing bowl.
    1. Combine sugar and lemon zest.
    Eggs, butter, lemon juice, vanilla, added to sugar mixture in glass mixing bowl.
    2. Add wet ingredients.
    Powdered sugar added to lemon mixture, in glass mixing bowl.
    3. Add dry ingredients.
    Lemon blondies mixture poured in to baking dish.
    4. Pour in to an 8×8 baking dish.
    Baked lemon blondies in an 8x8 baking dish.
    5. Bake lemon blondies at 350°F for 28-32 minutes and allow to fully cool before icing.

    How to Make Lemon Glaze Topping for Lemon Blondies

    Lemon, powdered sugar glaze mixture in a glass mixing bowl.
    6. Mix powdered sugar, lemon juice and vanilla.
    Lemon glaze spread on top of lemon blondies in an 8x8 baking dish.
    7. Spread over top of cooled blondies, and slice in to either 9 or 12 bars.

    TIP: Top iced blondies with slices of lemon (optional) for an adorable garnish.

    Three lemon blondies stacked on top of one another, with a bite taken out of the top of the top blondie.

    Top Tips

    • Parchment Paper: Spraying the baking pan before adding parchment paper helps keep it in place, and the parchment paper helps remove the blondies from the pan easily.
    • Measuring: When baking, it’s important to measure correctly so the recipe turns out the best. If you find it helpful, you can also check out my guide for baking measurements and conversions.
    • Baking Pan: If you only have a 9×13 pan instead of an 8×8 pan, this would make for thinner blondies and wouldn’t require as long of baking but I’m sure it can be done. Just be mindful of the thickness and bake time changes that may be needed.

    Serving Ideas for Lemon Blondies

    • These lemon blondies pair with a glass of cold milk, warm tea, or a dirty chai latte, for a cozy treat.
    • They make a great addition to a lemonade stand. See how to build your own lemonade stand out of crates.
    • Package lemon blondies up to give as neighbor gifts or to pack in a sunshine basket since they’re a beautiful yellow.

    Expert FAQs

    What makes lemon blondies different than lemon bars?

    Lemon bars are more of a custard-like treat, while lemon blondies have more of a brownie, and dense, texture.

    Do I have to use fresh lemons for blondies or can I use lemon juice?

    In a pinch, bottled lemon juice can work but for the best results, using fresh lemon is recommended, and so you can use the fresh zest as well.

    How do you make lemon blondies extra lemony?

    You can add extra lemon zest or even lemon extract to make the blondies extra full of lemon flavor.

    Storage Instructions

    • Extras: Store blondies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3 days or in the refrigerator for up to 1 week. Note that the lemon slices should be removed before storing so the juices don’t spoil the blondies.
    • Make-Ahead: The blondies can be baked and glazed a day in advance. Store them covered (without lemon slices) in the fridge and allow them to come to room temperature before serving.
    • Freezing Lemon Blondies: These can be frozen. It’s best to wrap them tightly in plastic wrap, and then store them in a freezer container. Freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to enjoy, thaw at room temperature and enjoy.

    More Lemon Dessert Recipes

    • Slice of lemon poke cake on white plate, with lemon wedge on top.
      Lemon Poke Cake
    • Slice of lemon meringue pie on small plate, with slice of lemon laying beside it.
      Lemon Meringue Pie
    • Lemon Puppy Chow in white bowl.
      Lemon Puppy Chow
    • lemon bundt cake on wood stand
      Creamy Lemon Pound Cake (Bundt Cake)

    I can’t wait to hear what you think of these lemon blondies! Everyone will surely love it, so you may want to plan on doubling the recipe.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Three lemon blondies stacked on top of one another on a piece of parchment paper.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Lemon Blondies

    These lemon blondies are made from scratch, using lemon zest and a few other simple ingreidents to create a lemon flavored dessert that's similar to a lemon brownie.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 9 blondies
    Calories 299kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Lemon Blondies

    • 1 cup granulated sugar
    • 2 tablespoons lemon zest which takes about 2 large lemons
    • ½ cup unsalted butter melted and cooled (1 stick of butter, melted)
    • 2 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
    • 2 teaspoons pure vanilla extract
    • 2 large eggs room temperature
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

    For the Lemon Glaze

    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 1½ tablespoons fresh lemon juice
    • ¼ teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • Thinly sliced lemons for garnish, optional

    Instructions

    For the Lemon Blondies

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F. Lightly spray an 8 x 8-inch baking dish with cooking spray, then line it with parchment paper, leaving an overhang for easy removal. The spray will help keep the parchment in place.
    • In a medium bowl, combine 1 cup granulated sugar and 2 tablespoons lemon zest. Use a whisk or whisk attachment to incorporate the zest into the sugar until it becomes fragrant and slightly moist. This enhances the lemon flavor.
    • Add ½ cup (1 stick) melted unsalted butter, 2 tablespoons lemon juice, 2 teaspoons pure vanilla extract, and 2 large eggs to the lemon sugar mixture. Whisk until smooth and well combined.
    • Add 1 cup all-purpose flour and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Stir gently with a spatula until just combined, being careful not to overmix.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared baking dish and spread it evenly. Bake for 28 – 32 minutes or until the edges are lightly golden and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out mostly clean. A few moist crumbs are fine.
    • Allow the blondies to cool completely in the pan before glazing. Use the parchment overhang to lift them out of the dish for easier glazing.

    For the Lemon Glaze

    • In a small bowl, whisk together 1 cup powdered sugar, 1 ½ tablespoons lemon juice, and ¼ teaspoon pure vanilla extract until smooth. The glaze should be thick but pourable. Adjust the consistency by adding more powdered sugar (for thickness) or a few drops of lemon juice (for thinning).
    • Pour the glaze over the cooled blondies, spreading it evenly with a spatula. Let it set for 15 – 20 minutes. Garnish with thinly sliced lemons if desired.
    • Cut into 9 or 12 squares and ENJOY!

    Notes

      • Parchment Paper: Spraying the baking pan before adding parchment paper helps keep it in place, and the parchment paper helps remove the blondies from the pan easily.
      • Storing: Store blondies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3 days or in the refrigerator for up to 1 week. Note that the lemon slices should be removed before storing so the juices don’t spoil the blondies.
      • Overbaking: It’s best to make sure you don’t overbake these, so they have the texture desired.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1blondie | Calories: 299kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 147mg | Potassium: 44mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 36g | Vitamin A: 376IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg

    Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread

    February 3, 2025

    Chicken Alfredo garlic bread slices.

    Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread: A combination of seasoned chicken, delicious Alfredo sauce, and crispy garlic bread. This bread recipe is perfect as a stand-alone recipe like a pizza, or even as a hearty side dish for an easy pasta recipe.

    Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread slices on baking sheet.

    I feel like this comfort food recipe will be one of those that you want to make on a lazy Sunday, or if you need a quick and easy dinner that the family will love during the week. Or, perhaps, serve it alongside an Alfredo pasta recipe like this Blackened Chicken Alfredo or Crab Pasta Bake.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    See recipe card below for full recipe.

    Ingredients for chicken Alfredo garlic bread.
    • chicken breasts – you could also use chicken thighs if you prefer or rotisserie chicken to keep things even easier. (Don’t forget to save the rotisserie carcass to make this rotisserie chicken broth.)
    • mozzarella cheese – if you have time, shredding your own mozzarella cheese is recommended since pre-shredded, store-bought cheese tends to have an anti-caking agent on it that keeps it from melting as smoothly.
    • butter – salted butter is recommended but you can use unsalted if that’s what you have on hand.
    • seasonings – garlic powder, onion powder, Cajun seasoning, Italian seasoning, salt, and pepper come together to flavor the chicken.
    • heavy cream – this is used to make the Alfredo sauce and is recommended more than milk, or half-and-half.
    • French bread – I usually find a loaf of French bread in the bakery at my local grocery store. If you buy it in the frozen aisle, make sure you get plain, and not the pre-seasoned bread.

    How to Make Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread

    Preheat oven to 350°F and line a sheet pan with parchment paper.

    Uncooked chicken breasts in skillet that are seasoned with seasonings.
    Step 1: Season both sides of the chicken.
    Cooked chicken breasts in skillet.
    Step 2: Cook both sides of the chicken.
    Sliced, cooked chicken breasts on cutting board.
    Step 3: Slice chicken in to smaller pieces.
    Alfredo sauce in skillet.
    Step 4: Make Alfredo sauce
    Garlic butter spread on to French bread slices.
    Step 5: Mix butter ingredients and spread on to bread.
    Alfredo sauce spread on to French bread slices.
    Step 6: Spread Alfredo sauce on top of French bread.
    Cooked chicken pieces on top of French bread, Alfredo sauce and garlic butter.
    Step 7: Top bread with chicken.
    Cheese sprinkled on top of French bread slices, chicken and sauce.
    Step 8: Top chicken with cheese.
    Baked chicken Alfredo garlic bread.
    Step 9: Bake garlic bread until golden brown.

    Top Tip:

    • If your bread is not getting crispy enough, you can toast it before adding the toppings and then bake it for 10-15 minutes after topping it with sauce and chicken just to get the cheese melted.
    • Add spice to the top with pickled jalapenos or red pepper flakes. If you desire a deeper level of heat, you can add ½ teaspoon of cayenne powder to your alfredo sauce while you’re cooking it.  

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you make the TikTok Viral Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread Recipe?

    Start by making a garlic butter, cook seasoned chicken breast, and make Alfredo sauce. Spread the garlic butter on the French bread, then top with Alfredo sauce, and sliced cooked chicken. Bake at 350° F for 20-25 minutes.

    What goes with Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread?

    Serving this bread recipe with a pasta recipe, a melt-in-your-mouth steak, or your favorite seafood dish.

    What kind of bread do you use for garlic bread?

    Using French bread is recommended for making garlic bread.

    Chicken Alfredo garlic bead cut in to slices on board.

    How to Store Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread

    Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread should be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days. You can reheat the dish using your air fryer at 375°F for 4-5 minutes or bake at 350°F until thoroughly heated. Do not recommend freezing. 

    Related Recipes

    If you love comfort food recipes like this one, then you’ll also love these top favorites:

    • pizza monkey bread
      Pizza Monkey Bread
    • French bread pizza, sliced on wooden cutting board.
      French Bread Pizza
    • Hand pulling a piece of cheesy pull apart bread off of loaf.
      Cheesy Pull Apart Bread
    • how to make Traditional Italian White Bread
      Easy Italian White Bread

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chicken Alfredo garlic bread slices.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread

    This Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread is a delicious combo of crispy bread, smooth Alfredo sauce, tender seasoned chicken, garlic butter and sprinkled with cheese and baked to perfection.
    Course Appetizer, Dinner, Main Course, Side Dish
    Cuisine Italian
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 servings
    Calories 801kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Garlic Bread

    • ½ cup salted butter room temperature
    • 1 tablespoon minced garlic
    • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley minced
    • 1 loaf French bread

    Chicken

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 pound chicken breast cut in half, lengthwise
    • 1 teasoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 teaspoon Cajun seasoning
    • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
    • salt and pepper to taste

    Alfredo Sauce

    • 2 cups Alfredo sauce Using my Alfredo sauce recipe

    Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread

    • 1 cup mozzarella cheese shredded
    • ½ cup parmesan cheese shredded
    • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F and line a sheet pan with parchment paper.

    How to Make Garlic Butter

    • In a small mixing bowl, combine the softened butter, garlic, and parsley. Cut your loaf of French bread half lengthwise and spread the butter mixture over both halves of the bread. Place the bread onto the sheet pan and set it aside.

    How to Cook Chicken

    • Season both sides of the chicken with the onion powder, Cajun seasoning, salt, and pepper.
    • Heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the chicken and cook until both sides are golden brown and the chicken reaches an internal temperature of 165°F. Transfer the chicken to a cutting board and allow it to rest for 3-4 minutes. Slice your chicken into half-inch pieces.

    Making Alfredo Sauce

    • In a large skillet, add your heavy cream, butter, and garlic. Cook over medium heat, whisking occasionally until the heavy cream has started to thicken. Slowly whisk in the Parmesan cheese, a little at a time, until all of the cheese has melted. Continue to cook until the sauce has reached a thick consistency.

    Assemble Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread

    • Spread about ¾ of the Alfredo sauce over the bread in an even layer. Sprinkle your mozzarella and Parmesan cheese over the top and evenly distribute the sliced chicken breast over the cheese. Drizzle the remaining alfredo sauce over the top.
    • Bake for 20-25 minutes until the bread is crispy.
    • Sprinkle your parsley over the top of the bread and slice into 1 to 2-inch pieces.

    Notes

    If your bread isn’t as crispy as you’d like it to be, you can toast it before adding the toppings and then bake it for 10-15 minutes after topping it with sauce and chicken just to get the cheese melted. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 801kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 49g | Saturated Fat: 26g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 196mg | Sodium: 1702mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1163IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 297mg | Iron: 4mg

    Oreo Rice Krispie Treats

    January 25, 2025

    Oreo rice krispy treats stacked on top of one another.

    Oreo rice krispie treats are a perfect combination of your favorite dessert, combined with your favorite Oreo cookies!

    Cookies and Cream Rice Krispies stacked

    Why You’ll Love These Oreo Rice Krispie Treats

    Quick Overview: In less than 15 minutes you can have an easy recipe for a classic no-bake dessert (with a spin) ready to enjoy after dinner or as an afternoon snack on the weekends!

    You can use any kind of chocolate sandwich cookies for this recipe but we call them Oreo rice krispie treats in our house because it’s our favorite brand for snacking and all of my favorite Oreo recipes, including this Oreo cheesecake.(We’ve tried others but they just don’t measure up to the original!)

    Classic Rice Krispies with a Twist

    Using Oreos in dessert recipes like this no-bake Oreo pudding dessert, or this Oreo cheesecake, is one of our favorite ways to kick up a regular old-fashioned dessert by adding sandwich cookies! So when it comes to classic rice krispie treats, we knew Oreos mixed in would be a hit too!

    Recipes with a twist are so fun to make! These carrot cake rice krispie treats are fun to try next!

    Marshmallow Desserts

    Adding melted marshmallows to desserts creates an ooey gooey texture that’s hard to create any other way! For instance, in these marshmallow cookies, it gives a that gooey center that regular cookies don’t have! Or making the old-fashioned popcorn balls using marshmallows, it allows them to hold their shape without sacrificing flavor!

    You can also use marshmallow fluff instead of marshmallows like I do in this Rice Krispie Treats with Marshmallow Fluff recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    As you can see in the photo below, it doesn’t take much to make these cookies and cream rice krispies treats!

    ingredients for cookies and cream rice krispies
    • unsalted butter
    • mini marshmallows (bag of marshmallows, mini-size)
    • milk
    • crispy rice cereal (such as Rice Krispies)
    • chocolate sandwich cookies (such as Oreos)

    See the full printable recipe card at the end of the post for quantities and instructions!

    Instructions

    Step 1:
    In large pot, melt butter on low heat. Add marshmallows and stir constantly until melted.

    Melting marshmallows in pot for rice krispy treats
    Pour marshmallows in to pot for melting

    Step 2:
    Stir in milk and remove from heat.

    melted marshmallows in pot
    Melted marshmallows in pan

    Step 3:
    Add riced cereal and 2 cups cookies to marshmallows (reserving the rest of the cookies for the top). Mix until well combined.

    add in rice krispies cereal in to marshmallows
    Pour in rice krispies
    Add in chopped Oreo cookies
    Add in Oreo’s to rice krispies
    Stir to combine marshmallows, rice krispies and oreos
    rice krispies, oreos and marshmallows in pan

    Step 4:
    Place mixture into 8×8 baking pan. Wet hands with water and press gently into prepared pan just until even. Sprinkle remaining ½ cup cookies evenly over top and press gently into treats.

    Place rice krispy treats in baking dish and mash evenly
    Oreo rice krispy treats

    Step 5:
    Chill for 3-5 minutes. Cut crispy treats into squares. Enjoy!

    Once hardened and cooled off, cut in to squares
    cookies and cream rice krispies bars

    Oreo Rice Krispy Treat FAQs

    What can I use instead of marshmallow for rice krispie treats?

    A lot of times, honey and peanut butter can be a substitute for marshmallows. Or using almond butter and maple syrup may be a great substitution if you don’t have marshmallows on hand.

    How do you keep rice krispie treats from sticking to your hands?

    If you spray Pam (non stick cooking spray) on your hands before patting down, this can help keep the treats and marshmallows from sticking to your hands. Another option is to place your hand inside of a small, greased (with butter or spray) plastic bag, to use as a “glove” to press down on the treats to flatten them out.

    What else can you add to rice krispie treats?

    If you’re looking for other items to add to rice krispy treats, you can add cookies, white chocolate chips, sprinkles, drizzle with syrups, different types of cereal such as cinnamon grahams, fruit circles, fruity rice krispies and more!

    Oreo rice krispy treats

    Expert Tips:

    • The larger the pot the better for easy mixing.
    • Do not allow butter to cook, heat until just melted.
    • Use fresh marshmallows
    • It is not necessary to grease the pan. The butter in the recipe is enough to prevent sticking.
    • If you prefer, you can place a piece of parchment paper or plastic wrap over the treats to press them into the pan. This will prevent your hands from getting messy.
    • Feel free to add a teaspoon of vanilla extract and mix in with the melted marshmallows. Not necessary but adds great flavor!
    Oreo rice krispy treat bars
    Oreo sandwich cookies in Rice Krispy bars

    How to Store Rice Krispy Treats

    Store room-temperature crispy bars, in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3 days for the best flavor. You can also wrap individually in plastic wrap.

    Cookies and Cream Rice Krispy treats
    No bake rice krispy treats with cookies

    What size baking pan to use for Oreo treats?

    If you want to make a larger batch, you can make this same recipe, with the same ingredients and simply switch out the 8×8 dish for a 9×13 dish, that will result in a thinner rice krispy treat, so it stretches them out more.

    rice krispy treats in 9x13 baking dish

    I do this when taking them to a potluck or somewhere where there will be a lot of kids! (If you’re headed to a large gathering, you may also love making this homemade Lucky Charms treat recipe, as kids love these too!)

    Oreo rice crispy treat square

    These have the potential to become your new favorite treats! I know they have in our house!

    Related Recipes:

    If you loved these treats, you’ll also love these Oreo Cinnamon Rolls and these marshmallow popcorn balls! Don’t forget about breakfast though because when you use Oreos in Pancakes, you may never make regular pancakes again!

    Recipe

    Oreo rice krispy treats stacked on top of one another.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Oreo Rice Krispie Treats

    Oreo rice krispie treats are a combination of your favorite dessert combined with your favorite Oreo cookies!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 2 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Resting Time 3 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 treats
    Calories 312kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter ¼ cup
    • 6 ½ cups mini marshmallows 10 ounce bag
    • 1 tablespoon milk 2% preferred
    • 6 cups crisped rice cereal like Rice Krispies
    • 2 ½ cups Oreo's or other sandwich cookies, coarsely chopped

    Instructions

    • In large pot, melt butter on low heat. Add marshmallows and stir constantly until melted. Stir in milk and remove from heat.
    • Add riced cereal and 2 cups cookies to marshmallows (reserving the rest of the cookies for the top). Mix until well combined. Place mixture into 8×8 baking pan. (Or 9×13 for thinner treats but that will also create more squares.)
    • Wet hands with water and press gently into pan just until even. Sprinkle remaining ½ cup cookies evenly over top and press gently into treats. Chill for 5 minutes. Cut into squares.

    Notes

    Tips:
    • The larger the pot the better for easy mixing.
    • Do not allow butter to cook, heat until just melted.
    • It is not necessary to grease the pan. The butter in recipe is enough to prevent sticking.
    • If you prefer, you can place a piece of parchment paper or plastic wrap over the treats to press them into pan. This will prevent your hands from getting messy.
    • If you want to make a larger batch, you can make this same recipe, with the same ingredients and simply switch out the 8×8 dish for a 9×13 dish, which will result in a thinner rice krispy treat, so it stretches them out more.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1treat | Calories: 312kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 177mg | Potassium: 87mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 119IU | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 3mg

    The BEST Vanilla Mug Cake Recipe

    January 25, 2025

    Vanilla Mug cake recipe on spoon

    Vanilla Mug Cake: A super EASY microwavable mug cake recipe without egg and a few other simple ingredients ready in just 7 minutes.

    Vanilla Mug Cake Recipe

    Cake recipes are a favorite easy dessert around here, and after making this multiple times and perfecting it, we’ve decided this is the BEST vanilla mug cake recipe that there is!

    Vanilla Mug Cake
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is a Mug Cake?

    A mug cake is a single-serving cake that you can make in a pinch when you have a craving for a sweet treat! With a few ingredients, you can microwave a cake in a microwave-safe mug, cup, or small bowl, for a perfect dessert just for you! If you’re looking to feed a crowd, this cloud cake would be a good alternative.

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe:

    • Dessert for one: When you’re on the hunt for single-serving desserts, this one tops the cake! (No pun intended… well, maybe a little.) Mug recipes may just become your new favorite thing!
    • Microwaved: The best part is that this vanilla mug cake recipe is mixed in and microwaved in the mug so you don't have to dirty any dishes except your measuring cups and spoons.
    • Kid-friendly: It’s the perfect treat if your kiddos have a sweet tooth and they want to try and make something on their own!
    • Texture: I was so pleasantly surprised by the texture of this mug cake. I was expecting weird and chewy and spongy but instead, it was light and fluffy. A key to keeping the texture super light and fluffy is mixing it just until it comes together. Any extra stirring could make it tough or gummy.

    How do you make a vanilla mug cake from scratch?

    It is made with common ingredients that you'll probably already have in your pantry and refrigerator, and you’ll only need a large mug to cook it in! You simply mix the ingredients (lightly) and then microwave them and it’s ready to eat.

    Ingredient List

    This only takes a few simple ingredients! Make sure to see the recipe card below for the full list of ingredients and instructions.

    Wet Ingredients:

    • melted butter
    • vanilla extract
    • milk

    What kind of milk to use for mug cake? I used 2% milk when testing the recipe but you can use whatever milk you have on hand whether it’s whole, skim, coconut, or almond milk.

    Dry Ingredients:

    • white granulated sugar
    • all-purpose flour
    • baking powder
    • salt
    Ingredients for Vanilla Mug cake

    Step by Step Directions

    • Add butter to your mug and microwave until melted.
    Melted butter and ingredients in mug
    • Stir vanilla extract, milk, and sugar into the butter.
    • Add flour, baking powder, and salt and stir until just combined.
    Wet ingredients before microwaving
    • Microwave mug cake for 1-½ to 2 minutes. Be careful removing the mug from the microwave as it may be hot.
    Microwaved mug cake ready to eat

    FAQs

    Can you reheat a vanilla mug cake?

    You can! If you don’t eat it all the first round, cover it with plastic wrap or aluminum foil and store in the refrigerator for up to one day. To reheat, simply remove cover and reheat in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until heated through.

    Can you eat mug cakes cold?

    Sure! If you don’t prefer to reheat it, you can eat it cold!

    What kind of mug do I use for mug cakes?

    If you’re making a mug cake in the microwave, be sure to use a microwave-safe mug as it could be really hot to the touch when finished cooking!

    Is it safe to eat mug cakes?

    Absolutely! It’s a great way to enjoy a quick sweet treat when the craving hits! Plus, with this recipe, you can add in your favorite toppings if desired!

    Vanilla Cake in a mug eating with a spoon

    Vanilla Cake Topping Ideas

    This vanilla mug cake is so great on its own but if you want to top this vanilla mug cake, here are my favorite ideas:

    • A scoop of Vanilla Ice cream
    • Mint Buttercream Frosting or Chocolate Buttercream
    • Strawberries and Whipped Cream
    • Fresh fruit
    • Sliced bananas
    • Peanut Butter
    • A dollop of whipped cream
    • Chocolate chips
    • Nuts
    • Brown Sugar
    • A drizzle of chocolate sauce
    • Salted caramel drizzle
    Vanilla Mug Cake

    More Cake Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love easy dessert recipes like this vanilla mug cake, you’ll also love these top fan favorites! This Milky Way Cake is increasingly popular, as well as this Easy Carrot Cake, this 7Up Pound Cake, and this Easy Pound Cake.

    Thank you to Meg's Everyday Indulgence for sharing another easy dessert recipe with us!

    • Blueberry dump cake, with serving spoon resting in pan.
      Blueberry Dump Cake (Easy, Buttery Dessert with Fresh Berries)
    • Cherry dump cake topped with homemade whipped cream, served in a dessert bowl.
      Cherry Dump Cake (Easy 3-Ingredient Dessert)
    • A serving of 3-ingredient dump cake in a bowl with a dollop of homemade whipped cream.
      Dump Cake Recipe (Easy 3-Ingredient Dessert That Always Works)
    • Orange upside down cake sliced on spatula.
      Orange Upside Down Cake

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Vanilla Mug cake recipe on spoon
    Print Pin
    4.86 from 107 votes

    Vanilla Mug Cake

    Vanilla Mug Cake: A super EASY mug cake recipe, using no egg, and uses simple ingredients that you make in the microwave!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 minutes minutes
    Total Time 7 minutes minutes
    Servings 1 serving
    Calories 493kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • Microwave safe mug

    Ingredients

    • 2 tablespoons butter
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ cup milk any type will work
    • 2 tablespoon granulated sugar
    • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
    • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt

    Instructions

    • Add butter to your mug. Microwave until melted. Stir vanilla extract, milk and sugar into the butter. Add flour, baking powder and salt and stir until just combined – do not overmix so it becomes light and fluffy.
    • Microwave mug cake 1.5 to 2 minutes. Be careful removing the mug from the microwave as it may be hot.

    Video

    Notes

    Note: I used 2% milk when testing the recipe but you can use whatever milk you have on hand whether it’s whole, skim or almond milk.
    A key to keeping the texture super light and fluffy is mixing it just until it comes together. Any extra stirring could make it tough or gummy.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 479mg | Potassium: 205mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 838IU | Calcium: 122mg | Iron: 1mg

    How to Make Alfredo Sauce

    January 24, 2025

    Easy Alfredo Sauce in skillet, next to fresh herbs and parmesan cheese wedge.

    Alfredo Sauce Recipe: This easy, classic white sauce recipe is ready in about 15 minutes and is delicious served over pasta, chicken, or your favorite Alfredo dish, especially this Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread recipe.

    Alfredo sauce in skillet, sitting next to fresh herbs.

    I love a good store-bought Alfredo sauce to make things fast and easy but there’s something about a homemade Alfredo that can add even more richness to a recipe.

    Looking to impress for a special anniversary dinner or a romantic Valentine’s Day? Making your own Alfredo sauce can really take things over the top.

    This Alfredo Chicken Lasagna and this Bacon Ranch Chicken Pasta Recipe both call for a jarred Alfredo sauce but you can easily use this homemade sauce recipe to make the recipes instead.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Ease: Alfredo sauce may sound difficult to make but it is really easy to make, especially following this step-by-step recipe. So this is great for beginners and a recipe that so many gourmet chefs can use too!
    • Versatile: Love adding additional ingredients to your Alfredo sauce? This is a great base recipe for your favorite additions. For instance, adding cracked red pepper to give it a little spice, or even Italian seasoning, to give it additional flavor.
    • Simple ingredients: It’s possible that you already have the ingredients on hand to make this recipe. If not, they can easily be found at most grocery stores.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for homemade Alfredo sauce recipe.
    • Parmesan cheese: Shredded Parmesan was used the day of making this recipe for you but grated parmesan cheese works as well, if not better. You can also use Asiago or Romano cheese in place or parmesan for a slightly different flavor. Pro Tip: Shredding or grating your cheese is so much better than storebought pre-shredded, as there are anti-caking ingredients added to most pre-shredded cheeses that prevent it from melting evenly.
    • Minced garlic: Mincing your garlic gives the most flavor but you can also keep things easier by using minced garlic in the jar/tube.
    • Butter: Feel free to use salted or unsalted butter for Alfredo sauce, although if buying butter specifically for this recipe, I’d opt for unsalted.
    • Heavy cream: This is highly recommended for this recipe to achieve the thickness and richness of the sauce. However, if you must, you can use milk and flour, or cornstarch, to add thickness. You can also use cream cheese, like in this cream cheese pasta.

    Make sure to see the recipe card below with all of the ingredient amounts and directions in one place.

    How to Make This Easy Alfredo Sauce Recipe

    Butter, garlic and heavy cream in a skillet.
    Step 1: Combine heavy cream, butter, and garlic.
    Shredded parmesan in skillet with heavy cream and garlic.
    Step 2. Add Parmesan cheese.
    Finished Alfredo sauce in skillet, sitting next to fresh herbs.
    Step 3: Serve with your favorite pasta, chicken, seafood, steak, or Alfredo recipe.

    Alfredo Sauce Recipe FAQs

    What is Alfredo sauce made of?

    Alfredo sauce is made using heavy cream, butter, Parmesan cheese, and garlic. Simple ingredients with a delicious rich flavor to serve over pasta, chicken, or in your favorite dish.

    Can you use milk instead of heavy cream for Alfredo?

    You can but it will result in a thinner sauce. Or, you can make a roux and add a little cornstarch or flour to thicken the Alfredo sauce if using milk instead of heavy cream.

    Is shredded or grated parmesan better for Alfredo?

    Freshly shredded or freshly grated parmesan are better than pre-grated or shredded. Both shredded and grated can work, although most believe that grated melts more evenly and is preferred.

    Storage Instructions

    If you’re storing homemade Alfredo sauce, allow it to fully cool and then store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Freezing this Alfredo sauce recipe can also be an option, for up to 3 months, if you allow it to fully thaw in the refrigerator before serving.

    More Alfredo Sauce Recipes

    If you love the flavors of Alfredo, you’ll also love these similar recipes that use Alfredo sauce:

    • Marry me chicken pasta in white bowl.
      Marry Me Chicken Pasta
    • Close up of blackened chicken on top of pasta Alfredo in skillet.
      Blackened Chicken Alfredo Recipe
    • Crab pasta bake being lifted out of baking dish with tongs.
      Crab Pasta Bake
    • Close-up of chicken and broccoli pasta with creamy sauce.
      Chicken and Broccoli Pasta

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Easy Alfredo Sauce in skillet, next to fresh herbs and parmesan cheese wedge.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Easy Alfredo Sauce Recipe

    This easy Alfredo sauce recipe comes together with just a few simple ingredients and is delicious served over pasta, or chicken or steak, an in your favorite lasagna recipe.
    Course Dinner, Side Dish
    Cuisine Italian
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings (about 2 cups)
    Calories 1507kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 tablespoons butter
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 1 teaspoon minced garlic
    • 1 cup shredded parmesan cheese

    Instructions

    • In a large skillet, add your heavy cream, butter, and garlic.
    • Cook over medium heat, whisking occasionally until the heavy cream has started to thicken.
    • Slowly whisk in the Parmesan cheese, a little at a time, until all of the cheese has melted.
    • Continue to cook until the sauce has reached a thick consistency.

    Notes

    You can use grated Parmesan cheese instead of shredded if you prefer.
    Feel free to add additional ingredients such as Italian seasoning, crushed red pepper flakes, or your favorite spices if desired, to achieve your favorite flavors.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.25cup | Calories: 1507kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 43g | Fat: 146g | Saturated Fat: 93g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 38g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 427mg | Sodium: 1937mg | Potassium: 340mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 5329IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 1357mg | Iron: 1mg

    Oreo Cinnamon Rolls

    January 24, 2025

    Cookies and Cream Cinnamon Rolls

    Oreo Cinnamon Rolls: A twist on traditional cinnamon rolls, these easy homemade cinnamon rolls are made with Oreo cookies!

    Cookies and Cream Cinnamon Roll on a plate.

    Homemade cinnamon rolls are a vintage recipe that is an incredible treat. When adding other flavors to them, like my strawberry cinnamon rolls, and now these Oreo cinnamon rolls, it makes them even more unbelievable.

    Why You’ll Love These Oreo Cinnamon Rolls

    There will always be a place in my heart for a classic cinnamon roll (you know the kind- fluffy cinnamon rolls smothered in luscious cream cheese frosting…mmm), like these mini cinnamon rolls too. They’re a classic, like this coffee cake recipe!

    But now and then I like to get creative and try something a bit different, and these cookies and cream cinnamon rolls were just the thing!

    You can never have too many tasty, easy recipes for something like cinnamon rolls, and I’m so excited to add this one to the list!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients for Oreo Cinnamon Rolls

    Ingredients for cookies and cream cinnamon rolls
    • 2 cups whole milk
    • 2 tablespoons dry active yeast
    • 2 tablespoons white granulated sugar
    • 2 tablespoons oil (vegetable, canola or coconut oil)
    • 4 cups all-purpose flour
    • 2½ cups Oreo cookies, crushed or chopped
    • ½ cup salted butter, melted

    Optional Cream Cheese Frosting Ingredients

    • 8 ounces cream cheese, softened
    • 2 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • extra crushed Oreos, optional

    How to Make Oreo Cinnamon Rolls

    1. In a small bowl, combine the warm milk, dry yeast, and sugar. Give the ingredients a quick stir and allow to rest under a towel until the yeast begins to foam. 
    2. Once the yeast is foamy, add the coconut oil and stir again.
    Combine yeast, sugar and milk in a small bowl.
    Combine yeast, milk, sugar.
    1. In a large bowl, combine the yeast mixture with the flour and 1 cup of the crushed Oreos. Use a wooden spoon to combine the ingredients until they begin to pull away from the bowl.

    Stand Mixer: You can combine the yeast mixture with the flour and Oreos in the bowl of a stand mixer, then use the paddle attachment to combine the ingredients on low speed until they begin to pull away from the sides of the bowl. 

    Oreos, yeast and mixture in mixing bowl.
    1. Pour the mixture out onto a lightly floured surface and knead for 3-4 minutes.

    Stand Mixer: Switch to the dough hook attachment and mix for 3-4 minutes until the dough forms a ball.

    1. Place the dough back in the mixing bowl, cover with plastic wrap, and allow to rise for 30 minutes at room temperature until it has roughly doubled in size.
    Oreo cinnamon roll dough in mixing bowl.
    Return dough to bowl and let rise.
    1. After it has risen, roll the dough out into a large rectangle about ½ inch thick. Spread the melted butter over the surface of the dough and rub the remaining 1 ½ cup of the chopped cookies into the butter. 
    Oreo cinnamon roll dough rolled out on counter.
    Roll dough to large rectangle.
    1. Roll the dough lengthwise (from the long side) to create a tube and then divide dough into 16 equal pieces (or 12 pieces, if you want larger rolls). You can use a sharp knife to cut the dough or use unflavored dental floss! Slide the floss under the dough roll where you want to cut it, then pull the two strings up and together in a cutting motion. 
    2. Spray your 9×13 with cooking spray and then place rolls in the 9×13 baking dish, cover with plastic wrap, and allow to rise for 20 minutes.
    3. As the dough is rising, heat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    Raw Oreo cinnamon roll dough rolled up in to rolls and in a baking dish.
    Place rolls in 9×13 pan.
    1. Bake the rolls for 15-18 minutes, or until a toothpick can be cleanly removed from the dough. Let the rolls cool for a few minutes. 
    Baked Oreo cinnamon rolls in baking dish.
    Bake rolls 15-18 mins.
    1. Spread the frosting of your choice (or follow the easy recipe in the card below) on top of warm cinnamon rolls and add a few extra cookie crumbs if you like. Serve and enjoy!
    Oreo cinnamon rolls topped with Oreo and cream frosting.

    Active Dry Yeast vs. Instant Yeast?

    You can use either of these forms of yeast for this yeast dough recipe. When using instant yeast, you do not need to add it to the wet ingredients and let it sit. Instead, simply add the instant yeast in with the dry ingredients (the flour and cookie pieces) and then mix it with your wet ingredients as the recipe indicates.

    Variations

    We used Oreo cookies in this Oreo cinnamon rolls recipe, but you could use any chocolate sandwich cookies and it would still taste great.

    For the frosting, we recommended a cream cheese frosting (like the one we use on our air fryer cinnamon rolls), but the options are endless. If you have a buttercream frosting, vanilla glaze, cream cheese glaze, or even chocolate frosting recipe that you like, give it a try!

    One Oreo cinnamon roll on a spatula, over a dish.

    Storage

    These cinnamon rolls can be stored in the fridge for about five days in an airtight container.

    Alternatively, you can store these cinnamon rolls either baked or unbaked in the freezer for up to three months. Simply allow the rolls to thaw in the fridge before eating or baking.

    Expert Tips and FAQs

    How do I make sure the cinnamon rolls aren't too dry?

    Since we are adding so many cookie crumbs, we need to cut back on the amount of flour we add to the recipe. Traditionally, we would use about five cups of flour to make this many cinnamon rolls but cutting out one cup of flour in place of the crushed Oreos it keeps the dough from drying out in the oven.

    What frosting goes best with Oreo cinnamon rolls?

    However, you can also add cookie crumbs to your cream cheese frosting to add an extra chocolatey flavor and give the frosting a different texture!

    How long are Oreo cinnamon rolls good for?

    The best way to store these cinnamon rolls is in the fridge for about five days in an airtight container. Alternatively, you can store these cinnamon rolls either baked or unbaked in the freezer for up to three months. Simply allow the rolls to thaw in the fridge before eating or baking.

    One oreo cinnamon roll on a spatula, over a dish
    Oreo Cinnamon Roll with Icing

    Related Recipes

    We have so many delicious Oreo cookie recipes on our website! If you liked these cookies and cream cinnamon rolls, you’ll also like these Oreo Rice Krispie treats and this easy, no-bake Oreo cheesecake recipe! Then of course this cookies and cream milkshake for the ultimate dessert!

    Looking for other cinnamon roll recipes? Try our air fryer cinnamon rolls or this cinnamon roll casserole!

    Or, these pumpkin cinnamon rolls are a hit during the fall months for sure!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Cookies and Cream Cinnamon Rolls
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Oreo Cinnamon Rolls

    Oreo Cinnamon Rolls: A twist on traditional cinnamon rolls, these easy homemade cinnamon rolls are made with Oreo cookies!
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 1 hour hour
    Cook Time 18 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 18 minutes minutes
    Servings 16 cinnamon rolls
    Calories 323kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups whole milk
    • 2 tablespoons dry active yeast
    • 2 tablespoons white granulated sugar
    • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil or canola or coconut oil
    • 4 cups all-purpose flour
    • 2½ cups Oreo cookies crushed or chopped
    • ½ cup salted butter melted

    Cream Cheese Frosting

    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • 2 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • extra crushed Oreos optional

    Instructions

    • In a small bowl, combine the warm milk, dry yeast, and sugar. Give the ingredients a quick stir and allow to rest under a towel until the yeast begins to foam. 
    • Once the yeast is foamy, add the coconut oil and stir again.
    • In a large bowl, combine the yeast mixture with the 4 cup of flour and 1 cup of the crushed Oreos. Use a wooden spoon to combine the ingredients until they begin to pull away from the bowl.
      Stand Mixer: You can combine the yeast mixture with the flour and Oreos in the bowl of a stand mixer, then use the paddle attachment to combine the ingredients on low speed until they begin to pull away from the sides of the bowl.
    • Pour the mixture out onto a lightly floured surface and knead for 3-4 minutes.
      Stand Mixer: Switch to the dough hook attachment and mix for 3-4 minutes until the dough forms a ball.
    • Place the dough back in the mixing bowl, cover with plastic wrap, and allow to rise for 30 minutes at room temperature until it has roughly doubled in size.
    • After it has risen, roll the dough out into a large rectangle about ½ inch thick. Spread the melted butter over the surface of the dough and rub the remaining 1 ½ cup of the chopped cookies into the butter. 
    • Roll the dough lengthwise (from the long side) to create a tube and then divide dough into 16 equal pieces (or 12 pieces, if you want larger rolls). You can use a sharp knife to cut the dough or use unflavored dental floss! Slide the floss under the dough roll where you want to cut it, then pull the two strings up and together in a cutting motion.
    • Spray your 9×13 with cooking spray and then place rolls in the 9×13 baking dish, cover with plastic wrap, and allow to rise for 20 minutes.
    • As the dough is rising, heat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • Bake the rolls for 15-18 minutes, or until a toothpick can be cleanly removed from the dough. Let the rolls cool for a few minutes.
    • Spread the frosting of your choice on top of warm cinnamon rolls and add a few extra cookie crumbs if you like. Serve and enjoy!

    Cream Cheese Frosting – if desired

    • Combine 8 oz. cream cheese, 2 cups powdered sugar and 1 teaspoon of vanilla in a bowl and mix together until evenly mixed. Sprinkle crushed Oreo's on top (or even mix in to the frosting before spreading if desired).

    Notes

    Storage: These Oreo cinnamon rolls can be stored in the fridge for about five days in an airtight container. Alternatively, you can store these cinnamon rolls either baked or unbaked in the freezer for up to three months. Simply allow the rolls to thaw in the fridge before eating or baking.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cinnamon roll | Calories: 323kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 180mg | Potassium: 134mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 227IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 4mg

    The BEST Crab Salad Recipe (Easy, Classic Recipe)

    January 13, 2025

    Crab salad in serving bowl.

    Crab salad is a classic, creamy seafood salad made with simple ingredients like crab meat, mayonnaise, and seasoning. This version keeps things easy but adds a few key touches that give it more flavor and better texture than the basic deli-style version.

    The creamy, savory salad recipe is perfect for a quick lunch, a side dish, or a potluck, similar to our chicken salad recipe!

    Crab salad in bowl, next to serving bowl.

    This has become one of our go-to quick lunches because it's simple, reliable, and always turns out great.

    If you’re looking for a sandwich, this crab meat sandwich recipe will be the one!

    What is Crab Salad?

    Crab salad is a cold, creamy seafood salad typically made with crab meat, mayonnaise, and simple seasonings. Most classic versions use imitation crab, which has a mild flavor and soft texture that works well with creamy dressings, and you’ll commonly see it in the deli at your grocery store.

    Crab salad in plastic container like a copycat deli recipe.

    It's commonly served as a sandwich filling, on crackers, or as a simple side dish. While some versions stay very basic, others add ingredients like celery, herbs, or a touch of mustard to give it more flavor and texture.

    This version keeps that classic, deli-style feel but adds a few small touches that make it more flavorful and well-balanced than the standard recipe.

    A Classic Crab Salad That's Better Than the Basic Version

    This is one of those recipes that's simple to make but still feels like something you'd get from a deli or grocery store. Using imitation crab keeps it affordable and convenient, while still giving you that classic crab salad flavor. It's great for busy days, meal prep, or when you need a reliable cold dish for gatherings.

    Why You’ll Love This Imitation Crab Salad Recipe

    If you love seafood dishes (or dare I say, even if you don’t) you’ll absolutely love this imitation crab recipe.

    • Uses simple, easy-to-find ingredients
    • Perfect for sandwiches, lunches, or side dishes
    • Budget-friendly and easy to make
    • Great for meal prep or potlucks
    • The creamy dressing gives this seafood salad recipe a great flavor! Similar to the dressing recipe for shrimp macaroni salad and tuna pasta salad, you can make multiple recipes using the same ingredients.
    • It’s so easy. In just 10 minutes, you’ll have a dish that you can serve with something like this fried shrimp recipe, or just eat it by itself for a quick lunch or even a light dinner.
    • It keeps well. If you’re looking for a salad recipe to feed a crowd, this is it! You can make it in advance, and even easily double/triple the recipe.

    Why This Crab Salad Recipe Works

    This recipe keeps things simple while still delivering great flavor. The imitation crab provides a mild seafood taste, while the creamy dressing brings everything together. It's the kind of recipe that works every time without needing complicated ingredients or extra steps.

    What Kind of Crab Is Used in Crab Salad?

    Most easy crab salad recipes, including this one, use imitation crab meat. It's fully cooked, easy to work with, and has a mild flavor that pairs perfectly with creamy dressings. While real crab can be used, imitation crab is the most common choice for quick, budget-friendly crab salad recipes like this.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    8 ingredients – yes! That’s all it takes to make this crab salad.

    Make sure to scroll to the recipe card towards the bottom of this post to see the ingredients and instructions all in one place.

    ingredients for crab salad on table
    • Flake crab meat – you can use the leg-style crab meat as well but flake crab gives this salad a better texture. We’ve even used flaked crab meat in this crab pasta recipe and it’s delicious!
    • Mayo – our favorite is Hellman’s or “Best Foods” mayo (not Miracle Whip) but any will do!
    • Celery – My husband isn’t a huge fan of celery in salad recipes but I absolutely LOVE it. It helps give a “crunch” to a creamy texture. (Although I omit the celery when making a crab salad sandwich.)
    • Dijon mustard – the flavor of the Dijon mustard adds the right about of “kick” to this salad.
    • Onion powder – it’s only a small amount but I feel it’s necessary.
    • Garlic powder – a simple ingredient but it packs the perfect flavor.
    • Salt – definitely optional but I feel it adds a nice touch. However, imitation crab can have salt in it too so maybe make sure it doesn’t have too much salt before adding.
    • Black pepper – not necessary but we prefer it!

    Instructions

    No cooking, and very little prep, this crab salad comes together and ready to eat, in minutes!

    1. Taking pieces of the flake crab meat, you can pull the crab meat apart with your hands or you can use a knife and cut it in to small, bite-size pieces. Place in a medium bowl.
    2. Next, pour the remaining ingredients on top of the crab meat.
    Steps 1 and 2 for making crab salad.
    1. Stir until evenly mixed.
    Mixed crab meat with spices and condiments
    1. Serve this simple crab salad recipe cold, as a side dish, main course on a bed of lettuce, or even on homemade sliced Italian bread or dip with spicy ranch crackers!
    The best crab salad recipe in a bowl, next to bowl and spoon.

    FAQs

    Can you eat imitation crab without cooking it?

    Absolutely! It’s often enjoyed right out of the package with melted butter, but it’s also delicious in a no-cook recipe like this easy crab salad.

    What is crab salad made of?

    Crab salad is usually made with crab meat (often imitation crab), mayonnaise, and simple seasonings like mustard, celery, and spices.

    What goes well with crab salad?

    Here are some dishes that pair well with crab salad: loaded baked potato soup, Bisquick cheddar biscuits, old-fashioned green beans, and even french fries.

    Can I use real crab instead of imitation crab?

    You can, but it will change the flavor and texture. Most quick and easy crab salad recipes use imitation crab for convenience.

    Substitutions

    Imitation Crab Meat: If you can’t find the flake-style of crab meat, you can use the leg-style. You can cut it in to small pieces but it won’t have the same texture. However, if you use a cheese grater, you could possible shred the crab meat to get it similar to a flake-style.

    Real Crab Meat: You can use fresh crab if you like the real thing but it will be quite a different result, especially if you use a canned crab meat. If you use real, snow-crab meat, that will be even better but of course feel free to experiement! We prefer the imitation crab meat for this recipe. If you have real crab meat, you may love to use it for this crab bisque!

    Mustard: You can definitely try using regular mustard but we prefer the “twang” that Dijon mustard has! Regular yellow mustard may have more of a “zing” so maybe add a little and taste test before adding the amount that we use for dijon. We use Dijon mustard in a lot of our savory salad recipes and in this ham salad!

    A fork holding a bite of crab salad.

    Variations

    Celery: You can absolutely make this crab meat salad without celery, and I actually prefer to make it without it if I’m serving on bread for crab salad sandwiches. (Although we do love celery in sandwich spreads, like this tuna salad recipe.)

    Red or Green Onions: We use onion powder in this recipe but added chopped red onion or chopped green onion may be another variation that would be delicious!

    Red Bell Pepper or Green Pepper: I absolutely love the flavor of bell peppers, so adding a bit of chopped bell pepper would add another level of “crunch” to this recipe.

    Seasoning: We stick with common ingredients for this recipe but feel free to use other items like seasoned salt, instead of of table salt, or even Old Bay Seasoning for additional flavor! Fresh dill or fresh parsley are also something that may be a good fit for a flavor boost!

    Hot Sauce: Love an extra kick? Add a few drops of hot sauce, to your desired spice level!

    Storage

    If making this cold salad ahead of time or simply storing leftovers, store in an airtight container for 3-4 days.

    Top Tips

    Make a large batch of this easy recipe to eat for busy lunch days or even serve as a side dish for a quick, weeknight dinner idea!

    • Use flake-style imitation crab for the best texture
    • Chill before serving for better flavor
    • Adjust mayo based on how creamy you like it
    • Add celery for crunch or leave it out for sandwiches

    What to Serve with Crab Salad

    Serve this alone or even on top of a green salad. It’s also great with:

    • crackers
    • as a sandwich
    • lettuce wraps
    • on a croissant

    This cold crab salad recipe pairs amazingly well with these dishes:

    • Fish finger tacos
    • BBQ Grilled Ribs or BBQ Pork Steaks
    • Smoked Chicken Tenders or these Smoked Cornish Hens
    • A Juicy Steak

    Related Recipes

    If you love this easy salad recipe, then you’ll also love these easy, savory salads!

    • Chicken salad with grapes and apples, sitting on bread.
      Harvest Chicken Salad
    • A bowl of wilted lettuce, that's leaf lettuce with bacon grease and salt.
      Wilted Lettuce
    • Chicken macaroni salad in a bowl.
      The BEST Chicken Macaroni Salad
    • Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad in big bowl, sitting on napkin.
      Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Crab salad in serving bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 25 votes

    The BEST Crab Salad

    This easy crab salad recipe is a creamy, quick, and simple dish made with imitation crab and pantry ingredients, perfect for sandwiches or a light meal.
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 servings
    Calories 247kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 16 ounces imitation flaked crab meat
    • ½ cup mayo
    • ½ cup diced celery
    • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • pinch black pepper

    Instructions

    • Tear apart the flaked crab meat, or cut in to small, bite-size pieces and place in medium sized mixing bowl.
    • Pour the remaining ingredients on top of the crab meat. Stir to fully blend ingredients. Serve!

    Video

    Notes

    How to Store Leftover Crab Salad
    If making ahead of time or simply storing leftovers, store in an airtight container for 3-4 days.
    Serving Sizes:
    This can vary, depending on if you’re having this as a main dish or as a side dish. For larger portions, this may only be 3 servings. For smaller portions, as a side dish, it can be closer to 5-6 servings.
    TIP: Make ahead of time for a potluck or to eat throughout the week for lunch or a busy weeknight dinner idea!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 247kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 10g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 810mg | Potassium: 41mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 62IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs

    January 12, 2025

    Chili cheese stuffed corn dogs on a platter.

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs are one of those comfort meals that hit the spot when you want to keep things easy. Three ingredients and just a few minutes are all you need.

    Chili cheese corn dogs recipe on baking sheet.

    Comfort food is delicious all year long and not just in the fall and winter months, and when it’s an easy comfort food recipe, well that makes things even better.

    Whether you’re buying everything pre-made like frozen corn dogs and canned chili for this recipe, or if you’re looking for more of a recipe, you can adjust it a bit and make your own mini corn dogs and use this easy chili recipe. Either way, this recipe is considered easy and great for beginners.

    Why You’ll Love Chili Cheese Stuffed Corn Dogs

    • Family-friendly: Adults and kids love this recipe, so even with some picky eaters it’s a winner at home.
    • Quick meal: Ready in about 30 minutes, this makes a great busy night dinner.
    • Pantry meal: Even though the frozen corn dogs are kept in the freezer, I still consider this a “pantry meal” because you can keep the ingredients on hand for those last-minute needs.

    Key Ingredients

    Ingredients in packaging for making chili cheese corn dogs.

    See the full list of ingredients and amounts in the recipe card below.


    • Frozen corn dogs – Regular size is best but you can also do mini-corn dogs if that’s what you have on hand. Or, you can make Wiener Winks to pour chili on top.
    • Canned chili – Use your favorite chili, whether that’s a homemade recipe, canned chili that’s spicy, without beans, without meat, etc.
    • Shredded cheddar cheese – Using pre-shredded cheese is quick and easy. However, if you have time, shredding your own block cheese melts better and tastes even better.
    • Optional toppings: onion, bacon, jalapeno, are just a few ideas that you can top your chili cheese corn dogs with.

    How to Make Chili Cheese Corn Dogs

    Frozen corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    Cooked corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    1. Bake corn dogs according to package directions.
    2. Carefully remove the wooden stick from the cooked corn dogs.
    Corn dogs sliced open ready for filling.
    Chili added to middle of corn dogs just before cheese is added.
    1. Slice each corn dog vertically down the center, about halfway through, being careful not to cut through the bottom.
    2. Into the cut, add chili, and cheese.
    Shredded cheese added to chili corn dogs.
    Baked chili cheese corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    1. Place back in the oven and cook for another 5 minutes or until the cheese has melted. Serve warm!

    Recipe Tips

    • When splitting the corn dogs open, make sure the centers aren’t frozen anymore, even though you’ll be warming them again with the chili and cheese.
    • If you find that your corn dogs are overcooked before adding the chili and cheese, you can cover them with aluminum foil to prevent them from burning more.

    Storing Tips

    Storing leftovers: Although the chili cheese corn dogs can be stored for later, this could result in a soggy corn dog. It’s best to assemble the chili cheese corn dogs right before eating. So storing the ingredients separately is recommended.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can you make chili cheese corn dogs in the air fryer?

    You can but it can get messy, since air is blowing around, and it could cause the shredded cheese to blow around, and the chili and cheese to get all over the air fryer basket. Making chili cheese corn dogs in the oven is my recommendation and for a super fast cook time, the microwave is the best option, although it will sacrifice texture.

    What is chili and cheese good on?

    Chili and cheese are delicious on corn dogs, oven-baked hot dogs, beef and cheese burritos, cheeseburger recipes, and a simple nacho recipe.

    What goes well with corn dogs?

    French fries, tater tots, and chips are classic side dishes for corn dogs. However, pasta salad recipes and fun savory dips like this taco layer dip pair wonderfully with them.

    Baked chili cheese stuffed corn dogs on a platter.

    Related Recipes

    • Fritos, chili, cheese, onions, all piled together in cardboard dish.
      Frito Chili Pie
    • White chicken chili in white bowl
      White Chicken Chili with Cream Cheese
    • Instant Pot Chili Mac
    • Chilis Southwestern Egg Rolls Copycat
      Chilis Southwestern Egg Rolls Copycat & Sauce

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chili cheese corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs are as simple as using frozen corn dogs, canned or homemade chili, and sprinkling with cheese, all cooked together, making it a family-favorite meal.
    Course Dinner, Lunch, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 corn dogs
    Calories 239kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 6 frozen corn dogs
    • 15 ounces canned chili or 2 cups; try my homemade chili recipe
    • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese
    • Optional toppings: onion, bacon, jalapeno, optional

    Instructions

    • Bake corndogs according to package the directions, with your preferred cooking method. I prefer oven-baked on a baking sheet, covered with parchment paper.
    • Carefully remove the wooden stick from the cooked corn dogs by sliding the stick out.
    • With a knife, slice each corn dog vertically down the center, about halfway through, being careful not to cut through to the bottom.
    • Pour about a ¼ cup of chili (or deisred amount) in to each cut corn dog, and sprinkle with shredded cheese.
    • Place back in oven (or preferred cooking method) and cook at the same temperature that was used to cook the corn dogs, and cook for another 5 minutes or until the cheese has melted. Serve warm!

    Video

    Notes

    Tip: When splitting the corn dogs open, make sure the centers aren’t frozen anymore, even though you’ll be warming them again with the chili and cheese. Bake them a little longer if needed before adding the chili and cheese to melt.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1corn dog | Calories: 239kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 153mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 278IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 163mg | Iron: 2mg

    Homemade Chicken Broth

    January 11, 2025

    Homemade Chicken Broth is easy to make, so rich in flavor to use in soups, pasta recipes or to sip on when you’re not feeling well. In about 2 hours, you’ll have chicken stock ready to use.

    Homemade chicken broth in a mason jar.

    This recipe uses a whole, uncooked chicken but if you have a rotisserie chicken on hand, did you know you can make chicken broth out of a rotisserie chicken too? It’s true, and it’s a great way to not let the bones go to waste.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Boiling a whole chicken is a great way to cook chicken for a lot of different recipes but it can also create a delicious chicken broth in the process.
    • Homemade chicken broth can have a rich flavor that storebought may not have.
    • This recipe uses simple ingredients to create a fresh flavor, and it’s also a great way to use up any vegetables or herbs you may have left from other recipes.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for homemade chicken broth.

    You can see the full list of ingredients and amounts in the recipe card below but I’ve included notes about some of the key ingredients here:

    • Whole chicken: Sizes of the chicken will vary, so just make sure your pot is big enough to hold the chicken and enough water to cover it.
    • Dried thyme: If you decide to use fresh thyme, this will be about 3-4 sprigs.
    • Dried rosemary: If using fresh rosemary instead, only one sprig of fresh rosemary is needed.
    • Black peppercorns: Don’t feel the need to go out and buy peppercorns just for this recipe, especially if you don’t have a grinder to use the rest in other recipes. Ground black pepper will work as well.
    • Onion: Yellow or white onions are best for making chicken broth.

    How to Make Homemade Chicken Broth

    Chicken broth ingredients in large pot before cooking.
    Step 1: Add chicken, and all other ingredients to the stock pot.
    Cooked chicken broth ingredients in pot.
    Step 2: Bring to a boil and simmer for 1-1.5 hours.
    Ladle scooping chicken broth in to mixing bowl.
    Step 3: Strain vegetables and herbs to separate broth.
    Clear chicken broth in mixing bowl with ladle.
    Step 4: Store broth for later use or use in your favorite dishes right away.

    FAQs

    Is chicken broth just boiled chicken water?

    Basically yes, however, adding herbs and vegetables to the chicken and water can give the broth more flavor.

    What is the difference between chicken stock and chicken broth?

    Chicken broth is made from boiling chicken meat, vegetables, and seasonings. Chicken stock is made by boiling just the bones.

    Can you put raw chicken in boiling broth?

    It’s best to place the raw chicken in the stock pot and then add the water and begin to boil.

    Homemade chicken broth in mason jars sitting next to stock pot.

    How to Store Chicken Broth

    To store: Let cool to room temperature, and transfer to airtight containers or jars. It can be stored in the fridge for up to five days.

    To freeze: This also freezes beautifully, for up to three months! Be sure to use a freezer-safe container if you choose to do this method!

    To thaw: Place the container in the fridge overnight and reheat as needed.

    Recipes to Use With Chicken Broth

    Now that you have your homemade broth made, here are a few favorite recipes that you can use it in:

    • Homemade chicken noodle soup.
      The Best Chicken Noodle Soup Recipe – Quick and Easy
    • Homemade Chicken Pot Pie in white pie dish, with a peek at the veggies and chicken.
      Easy Chicken Pot Pie Recipe
    • buffalo chicken soup in white bowl with green onions and chips
      Buffalo Chicken Soup Recipe
    • Bowl of ham and beans with spoon, and cornbread sitting on side of bowl.
      Ham and Beans Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Homemade Chicken Broth

    This homemade chicken broth recipe is ready to use in about 2 hours and comes together using simple ingreidents to give this broth a rich flavor.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 3 quarts
    Calories 62kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 whole raw chicken
    • 2 quarts water
    • 1 tablespoon dried thyme
    • 1 tablespoon dried rosemary
    • 1 tablespoon black peppercorns
    • 2 tablespoons sea salt
    • 2 bay leaves
    • 4 cloves garlic
    • 3-4 carrots
    • 3-4 celery stalks
    • 1 onion
    • 1 handful fresh parsley

    Instructions

    • In a large stock pot, place whole chicken in the bottom. Combine thyme, rosemary,peppercorns, salt, bay leaves, garlic, carrots, onion, celery, and parsley. Pour water over top until ingredients are covered. 3-4 quarts.
    • Bring to a boil over high heat, and when boiling, reduce to a simmer and cook for about an hour, to an hour and a half or until chicken is done, and vegetables are soft.
    • Once it has finished cooking, remove veggies and chicken with a slotted spoon. (don't throw that beautiful chicken away! Shred and store for later use!
    • Strain the liquid through a mesh strainer, you can line with cheesecloth, but I don't mind a few little herbs in my stock. You can add more salt if needed.
    • If not using right away, let the stock cool to room temperature, and transfer to airtight containers or jars, and place in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    • This broth can be stored in the fridge for up to five days.
    • This also freezes beautifully, for up to three months! Be sure to use a freezer-safe container if you choose to do this method!
    • To thaw, place the container in the fridge overnight and reheat as needed.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 62kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 0.3mg | Sodium: 4733mg | Potassium: 346mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 10416IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 110mg | Iron: 3mg

    Twix Cookies

    January 11, 2025

    Stack of Twix cookies on white marble counter.

    Twix Cookies, a combo of a buttery shortbread base, gooey caramel, and smooth chocolate. These chocolate caramel cookies have the taste of Twix candy bars, in cookie form.

    Twix cookies with chocolate and caramel topping, stacked on top of one another.

    If you are left with the urge to make more easy recipes with chocolate, you could try my No Bake Chocolate Pie for those times when you don’t want to turn on the oven.  Or for another delicious dessert, make some Chocolate Peanut Butter Brownies that combine two of the best flavors in one recipe!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Perfect for all occasions: Whether it's a holiday, birthday party, or just a casual gathering, these Twix bar Cookies will be the talk of the event, appealing to both children and adults alike.
    • Customizable to taste: If you're feeling creative, this recipe can easily be adapted with different types of chocolate or add-ins like nuts and sea salt for a personalized touch to this perfect treat.
    • Kid-friendly kitchen activity: Making Twix Cookies can be a fun and educational experience for children, allowing them to help with dipping in chocolate and layering the ingredients, all while learning basic baking skills.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients with text, for Twix cookies recipe.
    • Powdered Sugar – Also known as confectioners’ sugar, this fine sugar is essential for creating a smooth and spreadable frosting. For best results, sift the powdered sugar before using it to prevent lumps and ensure a silky texture on your Twix Cookies.
    • Caramels – Quality matters when it comes to the caramel layer. Choose a premium brand of caramels for melting. For a foolproof melt and rich flavor, consider using soft caramels from a confectioner’s shop.
    • Milk Chocolate Chips – For the classic Twix taste, use high-quality milk chocolate chips. Ghirardelli chocolate chips melt beautifully and provide a luxuriant, creamy finish that complements the caramel and shortbread layers perfectly.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Caramels – If you are unable to find soft caramels, you can opt for a homemade caramel sauce or even dulce de leche as a rich and creamy alternative.
    • Cream – In recipes that require cream, such as for a caramel layer, coconut cream can be a lactose-free substitute that adds a subtle tropical flavor. For those not averse to dairy but out of cream, condensed milk can sometimes serve as a suitable alternative, especially in sweet recipes.
    • Milk Chocolate Chips – For a less sweet or dairy-free option, dark chocolate chips can be used. For a vegan alternative, look for dairy-free chocolate chips made with a cocoa butter base. If you want a more intense chocolate flavor, try using semi-sweet chocolate chips instead.

    Variations

    • White Chocolate Dream: Swap the milk chocolate for white chocolate chips for a sweeter, creamier taste. This version is especially delightful for white chocolate enthusiasts.
    • Nutty Crunch: Mix in some finely chopped pecans or almonds into the caramel layer before setting, adding texture and a nutty flavor to your delicious cookie.
    • Sea Salt Sprinkle: Enhance the flavors by lightly sprinkling sea salt over the chocolate layer before it sets, offering a savory contrast to the sweet caramel and chocolate.
    • Cookie Butter Base: Experiment with cookie butter spread as a base layer for a twist that brings a spiced, gingerbread-like dimension to the flavor profile.

    How to Make Twix Cookies

    STEP 1: Prepare Baking Sheets – Line two baking sheets with parchment paper to prevent cookies from sticking.

    STEP 2: Mix Dry Ingredients – In a large bowl, combine flour, sugar, and salt by whisking them together.

    STEP 3: Incorporate Wet Ingredients – Melt butter and add it to the bowl along with the vanilla. Use a spatula to mix the ingredients until they’re just combined, then use your hands to form a dough ball.

    STEP 4: Chill Dough – Flatten the dough into a disk, cover it in plastic wrap, and refrigerate between 1 hour and overnight to firm up.

    STEP 5: Rest Dough – Before rolling, let the dough rest at room temperature for 15 minutes to 1 hour, depending on how long it was chilled.

    STEP 6: Preheat Oven – Around 10 minutes before you’re ready to roll out the dough, set the oven to preheat at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

    STEP 7: Roll and Cut Dough – On a floured surface, gently roll the dough to a thickness between ¼ and ½ inch, then use a round cookie cutter to form circles. Place the cut cookies on the prepared sheets, spacing them about 1 inch apart. Re-roll and cut any remaining dough.

    Baked shortbread cookies on a baking sheet, ready for Twix topping.

    STEP 8: Bake Cookies – Bake for 12-14 minutes until the edges are firm and the bottoms of the cookies have a light golden hue. Allow them to cool on the baking sheet for a few minutes before transferring them to a cooling wire rack.

    STEP 9: Melt Caramels – Place caramels in a medium bowl with cream or milk and melt in the microwave oven, stirring halfway through the heating process until smooth and fully melted.

    STEP 10: Add Caramel to Cookies – Dollop a tablespoon of the melted creamy caramel onto the top of each cookie, spreading it close to the edges, and then chill the cookies to set the layer of caramel.

    STEP 11: Melt Chocolate – Put chocolate chips and oil in a microwave-safe bowl and heat in short bursts, stirring regularly to avoid overheating until fully melted.

    Image collage of how to make Twix Cookies.

    STEP 12: Layer Chocolate – Spoon or scoop the melted chocolate onto the caramel-covered cookies, spreading it nearly to the caramel’s edges with a swirling motion.

    STEP 13: Set Chocolate – Allow the chocolate to harden on the cookies for a short time in the fridge or at room temperature, then they are ready to enjoy!

    Twix cookies ready to eat, sitting on white plate, with chocolate and caramel topping.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Evenly Rolled Dough: For uniform cookies, use rolling pin guides or a pair of chopsticks on either side of the dough when rolling it out.
    • Precise Caramel Layer: To achieve a neat caramel layer, use a silicone mold or an ice cube tray sprayed with cooking spray as a template. Pour the caramel into the mold, then freeze for easy placement on your cookies.
    • Smooth Chocolate Topping: For a glossy chocolate finish, consider tempering the chocolate if you’re experienced with the technique, or else ensure your chocolate isn’t too hot when you pour it over the caramel for that smooth shiny surface.
    • Cookie Craftsmanship: If your chocolate sets too quickly, warm the knife in hot water before slicing for cleaner cuts without cracking the chocolate layer.
    • Cream Over Milk: I strongly suggest using cream instead of milk for the caramel. The cream creates a thicker and more stable caramel layer. When milk is used, the caramel may spread slightly after being at room temperature. However, milk can still be used if necessary.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use gluten-free flour instead of all-purpose flour for the cookies?

    Yes, you can use a gluten-free flour blend designated for baking, but keep in mind that the texture and taste of your cookies may vary slightly from the original recipe.

    What can I substitute for vanilla extract in the cookie dough?

    If you don’t have vanilla extract, you can try almond extract for a different flavor profile or omit it altogether. The buttery flavor of the shortbread will still shine through.

    Is there a way to prevent the caramel from becoming too hard?

    The key is to watch the caramel closely as it melts with the cream or milk. Overcooking can cause it to harden too much once cooled. Additionally, adding a bit more cream or milk can help keep the caramel layer soft.

    Can I use a stovetop method to melt the chocolate and caramel instead of a microwave?

    Absolutely! You can melt both the caramel and chocolate in a double boiler on the stove, just be sure to stir continuously to prevent burning and to achieve a smooth texture.

    My cookies came out too crumbly, what did I do wrong?

    Crumbly cookies can result from various factors, including measuring the flour incorrectly, overmixing the dough, or not allowing the dough to chill sufficiently. Make sure to measure your ingredients carefully and follow the steps for chilling and resting the dough.

    How do I ensure my cookies are all the same size?

    Use a cookie cutter or the rim of a glass to ensure consistent shapes and sizes. For even thickness, use a rolling pin with adjustable rings or place guides such as wooden dowels on each side of the dough when rolling out.

    What to Serve with Twix Cookies

    Twix cookies are a delightful treat on their own, but they also pair beautifully with a variety of beverages and snacks. Serve them alongside a steaming mug of hot cocoa or a cold glass of milk to complement their rich, buttery flavors. 

    If serving at a gathering, consider a dessert platter with fresh fruit and an assortment of cheeses, which will offer a pleasant counterbalance to the caramel and chocolate notes of the cookies.

    Storage

    To keep your Twix cookies tasting fresh, place them in an airtight container and store at room temperature for up to 5 days. For longer storage, you can refrigerate them for up to 2 weeks. 

    To freeze: These cookies are also freezer-friendly-layer them between sheets of parchment paper in a freezer-safe container, and they can be stored for up to 3 months. 

    To thaw: Simply thaw them at room temperature or give them a brief stint in the microwave for a warm, gooey treat.

    More Cookie Recipes You’ll Love

    In the mood for more cookies? You could try making these Rocky Road Cookies that are packed with flavor but still simple to make.  Or try some of my Easy Chocolate Turtle Cookies Recipe if you are still craving chocolate and caramel!

    Or, for some of my other favorite easy desserts, give one of these a try:

    • Cherry bread with cherry icing on wooden cutting board.
      Cherry Bread with Cherry Glaze
    • A collage of old-fashioned dessert recipes
      Old-Fashioned Desserts Everyone Knows and Loves
    • Hot fudge sauce dripping from spoon in to bowl.
      Hot Fudge Sauce Recipe
    • Strawberry Bread loaf with Strawberry Icing, dripping down the side.
      Strawberry Bread with Strawberry Icing

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Stack of Twix cookies on white marble counter.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Twix Cookies

    Twix Cookies: An easy cookie recipe made with a thumbprint to trap in all of that gooey caramel center and sweet chocolate drizzle.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 40 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 32 cookies
    Calories 235kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 cups all-purpose flour spooned into measuring cup and leveled
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 ¼ cup unsalted butter melted
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 packages of 11-ounce caramels
    • 2 tablespoons cream or milk
    • 2 cups milk chocolate chips
    • 2 teaspoons vegetable oil

    Instructions

    • Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together flour, sugar and salt.
    • Add melted butter and vanilla and combine ingredients together with a spatula, just until incorporated and combined. Using your hands, form the dough into a ball.
    • Flatten dough into a disk, cover with plastic wrap, and chill dough for 1 hour to overnight. The dough can be rolled out without refrigeration but will stay together best with a little chilling.
    • Take the dough disc out of the fridge and let rest for 15 minutes- 1 hour depending on the length of refrigeration. The dough needs to be slightly soft to be able to roll out.
    • 10 minutes before rolling out, preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • On a floured surface, gently roll dough ¼ to ½ inch thick. Using a 2 ½ inch round cookie cutter, cut dough into circles and place on prepared baking sheets about 1 inch apart. Combine leftover dough and roll out and cut again until all the dough is used.
    • Bake cookies for 12-14 minutes until the edges are set and the bottom of the cookies are lightly golden. Let cool on cookie sheets for 2-3 minutes and transfer to a cooling rack to cool.
    • Unwrap caramels and place them in a medium-sized microwaveable bowl. Add cream or milk. Microwave for 45 seconds. Remove the bowl from the microwave and stir with a wooden spoon. Reheat in the microwave for an additional 30-45 seconds and stir until caramel is completely melted, slightly reheating again in the microwave if necessary.
    • Using a tablespoon or 1-inch cookie scoop, drop approximately 1 tablespoon of caramel onto the center of a cookie. Using the back of a spoon sprayed with cooking spray, spread the caramel to almost the edge of the cookie. Place the cookie on a clean cookie sheet and repeat with all the cookies. Place cookies in the fridge for approximately 15-30 minutes for the caramel to set.
    • Pour chocolate chips into a microwaveable bowl. Add oil. Microwave for 30 seconds, then stir with a spatula. Repeat in 15-second intervals, stirring between each one, until chocolate is completely melted. Do not microwave for too long or the chocolate will overheat and seize.
    • Using a spoon or a 1-inch cookie scoop, place ¾ tablespoon of chocolate on the center of the cookie over the caramel. Spread the chocolate with a spoon, knife, or offset icing spatula to almost the edges of the caramel, swirling as you go.
    • Allow the chocolate to set, for a few minutes in the fridge or at room temperature, and enjoy!

    Notes

    • Evenly Rolled Dough: For uniform cookies, use rolling pin guides or a pair of chopsticks on either side of the dough when rolling it out.
    • Precise Caramel Layer: To achieve a neat caramel layer, use a silicone mold or an ice cube tray sprayed with cooking spray as a template. Pour the caramel into the mold, then freeze for easy placement on your cookies.
    • Smooth Chocolate Topping: For a glossy chocolate finish, consider tempering the chocolate if you’re experienced with the technique, or else ensure your chocolate isn’t too hot when you pour it over the caramel for that smooth shiny surface.
    • Cookie Craftsmanship: If your chocolate sets too quickly, warm the knife in hot water before slicing for cleaner cuts without cracking the chocolate layer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 235kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 124mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 355IU | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.8mg

    Biscoff Fudge

    January 8, 2025

    The center of the photo is a stack of 3 pieces of fudge with additional pieces scattered around the stack

    Biscoff Fudge: Creamy layers of cookie butter-infused fudge, white chocolate fudge, and crunchy cookie pieces make this easy no-bake dessert absolutely irresistible! Much like our No Bake Biscoff Pie, which looks beautiful sitting next to this fudge on your holiday dessert table.

    A close up photo of pieces of fudge stacked up in the foreground with a jar of cookie butter in the background

    If you need a simple no-bake dessert that is a crowd-pleaser than look no further than fudge! These easy fudge recipes are the perfect treat for your sweet tooth: decadent Cookie Dough Fudge or our classic Peanut Butter fudge!

    Why You’ll Love This Fudge Recipe

    This delicious fudge is made with a handful of ingredients. No, literally – there are only 5 ingredients! Better yet, you can find all of them at your local grocery store!

    If you are a Biscoff lover, then this fudge recipe will make your day. There is Biscoff cookie butter and Biscoff crumbs (if you have extra crumbs, consider making a Biscoff crust for later or even making this Biscoff cupcake recipe to sprinkle the crumbs on top!) stirred inside the fudge and there are even more Biscoff cookies crumbled on top!

    Fudge transports easily so it makes a natural dessert choice for a potluck or party and a great gift for the foodies in your life.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    You’ll make this Biscoff fudge with white chocolate, Biscoff cookies (or speculoos biscuits), and a few more pantry ingredients. That’s it!

    Bowls of white chocolate chips, crushed Biscoff cookies and sweetened condensed milk and a jar of cookie butter are displayed on a white marble background
    Ingredients
    • White chocolate chips – I love the Ghiradelli brand but you can use your favorite.
    • Vanilla extract – pure vanilla extract is recommended over imitation, although it will work if that’s what you have.
    • Biscoff cookie butter spread – usually found in the grocery store by the peanut butter.
    • Biscoff cookies (or “Lotus”) – usually found in the grocery store, along with other cookies.

    See the printable recipe card below for the full list of ingredients, instructions, and detailed notes for this creamy Biscoff fudge.

    How to Make Biscoff Fudge

    You will love how easy this fudge recipe is! The step-by-step instructions below will give you a gorgeously layered, addictively flavored fudgy dessert in no time!

    1. First, line an 8×8 baking dish with parchment paper or wax paper and set it aside.
    2. Then, in a large microwave-proof bowl, combine the sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract and microwave for 30 seconds until the mixture is hot but not bubbling.
    3. Add the white chocolate chips to the hot milk mixture and let the sit for about 30 seconds before stirring to allow them to melt. You can microwave it for an additional seconds if needed to melt the chips completely. Stir until all of the chips are melted and the mixture is smooth and creamy. *Remove 1 ½ cups of the white chocolate fudge mixture and set it aside.
    A glass mixing bowl containing sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract is centered on a white marble background
    Heat milk and vanilla
    White chocolate chips have been added to a glass mixing bowl containing sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract
    Add white chocolate chips
    1. Now, add the Lotus cookie butter and fine Biscoff crumbs into the large bowl of warm white chocolate mixture.
    A scoop of cookie butter has been added to a creamy white chocolate mixture in a large glass mixing bowl
    Stir in cookie butter
    Biscoff cookie pieces have been added to a glass mixing bowl with a cookie butter white chocolate mixture
    Add cookie crumbs
    1. Stir the biscoff fudge mixture until the cookie spread and cookie crumbs are incorporated. Work quickly as the fudge will start to thicken fast.
    2. Pour the cookie butter mixture into the prepared dish and spread it evenly in the bottom of the pan.
    A large glass mixing bowl contains a caramel colored mixture studded with cookie pieces
    Mix well
    Caramel colored fudge studded with cookie pieces has been spread in a parchment paper lined 8x8 white baking dish
    Spread in an 8×8 pan
    1. Then, pour or spread the reserved white chocolate mixure over the biscoff layer.
    2. Sprinkle the large Biscoff biscuit pieces over the top of the white chocolate fudge layer. Place the dish in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to all the fudge to cool and set.
    A layer of melted white chocolate has been spread on top of fudge in a square white baking dish
    Add the white chocolate layer
    Biscoff cookies pieces and cookie crumbs top a pan of fudge
    Top with cookie pieces
    1. Finally, remove the fudge from the refrigerator and cut it into about 30 squares. Serve the cookie butter fudge chilled or at room temperature
    A pan of white chocolate cookie topped fudge has been cut into squares. A jar of cookie butter and speculoos cookies are in the top of the photo as well

    Have no fear. Those small pieces of fudge pack BIG Biscoff flavor!

    Substitutions & Variations

    We’re sharing a few ways you can easily adjust this recipe below:

    • Vanilla extract pairs well with the Biscoff cookies, but you can use almond extract for a hint of slightly nutty flavor.
    • We used white chocolate chips, but you can also make this fudge with milk chocolate chips. The flavor will change slightly, but I bet it will still be utterly delicious. Can you ever go wrong with cookies and chocolate?
    • If you can’t find the Lotus brand of Biscoff spread, Trader Joe’s cookie butter is a perfect substitute.

    FAQs

    Don’t be surprised if this is the first time you’ve heard of Biscoff cookies or Biscoff spread. However, once you buy them, I’m fairly certain it won’t be your last!

    • What is the flavour of Biscoff? Biscoff cookies (or Lotus Biscoff biscuits or speculoos cookies) are a crispy buttery cookie with the warm flavors of brown sugar, cinnamon and ginger.
    • What is Biscoff made of? Like most cookies, there are basic ingredients like flour, sugar, oil and a leavening (rising) agent. Then, to give that warm spicy flavor, cinnamon is added. There are no nuts in Biscoff cookies.
    • What is Biscoff spread used for? This spread has the consistency of peanut butter but it tastes like spreadable cookies! You can put Lotus Biscoff spread on toast or English muffins, use it to make this fudge (of course!), heat it up and drizzle it on ice cream, blend it with cream cheese to slather on bagels, use it to dip fruit in or just eat it by the spoonful. (We won’t tell.)
    A close up photo of pieces of fudge that allows the layers of fudge, white chocolate and cookie pieces

    Storage

    This Biscoff fudge can be stored in an air-tight container in your refrigerator for up to 7 days.

    You can also store this creamy fudge in a freezer-safe container for up to 6 months in your freezer. You never have to go fudge-less again!

    A close up photo a stack of pieces of fudge, surrounded by more fudge squares, a jar of cookie butter and a few more speculoos cookies

    Related Recipes

    Biscoff fans, this Biscoff Cheesecake is absolutely scrumptious and these Biscoff truffles are equally as good! And if you’re a sucker for a recipe that celebrates cookies, try the BEST Oreo dessert! Finally, if you need another no bake dessert that is delicious any time of year, No Bake Peanut Butter Bars should do it!

    What Biscoff desserts should we make next? Biscoff brownies? Biscoff cupcakes? Let me know!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    The center of the photo is a stack of 3 pieces of fudge with additional pieces scattered around the stack
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    Biscoff Fudge

    Biscoff Fudge: Creamy layers of cookie butter infused fudge, white chocolate fudge and crunchy cookie pieces make this easy no-bake dessert absolutely irresistible!
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Chilling Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 30 squares
    Calories 167kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 14 ounces sweetened condensed milk
    • 3 cups white chocolate chips
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • ½ cup Biscoff cookie butter
    • 12 Biscoff cookies crushed into fine crumbs
    • 6 Biscoff cookies crumbled into pieces

    Instructions

    • Line an 8×8 baking dish with parchment paper and set aside.
    • In a large microwave-safe bowl, combine the sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract and microwave in 30-second intervals until the mixture is hot, but not bubbling.
    • Quickly add the white chocolate chips to the hot milk mixture and let them sit for about 30 seconds before stirring to allow the white chocolate chips to melt. You can microwave it for an additional 30 seconds if needed to melt the chips completely. Stir until all chips are melted and the mixture is smooth. Remove 1 ½ cups of the white chocolate chip mixture and set it aside.
    • Now, add the cookie butter and fine Biscoff crumbs into the large bowl of warm white chocolate mixture.
    • Stir the biscoff fudge mixture until the cookie spread and cookie crumbs are incorporated. (Work quickly as the fudge will start to thicken fast.)
    • Pour the cookie butter mixture into the prepared dish and evenly pour or spread it in the bottom of the pan. Then, pour or spread the remaining white chocolate mixture that you set aside over the biscoff layer.
    • Sprinkle the large Biscoff biscuit pieces over the top of the white chocolate fudge layer. Place the dish in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to all the fudge to cool and set.
    • Remove the fudge from the refrigerator and cut it into about 30 squares. Serve this easy fudge chilled or at room temperature.

    Video

    Notes

    • This Biscoff fudge can be stored in an airtight container in your refrigerator for up to 7 days or in a freezer-safe container for up to 6  months in the freezer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1square | Calories: 167kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 33mg | Potassium: 101mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 41IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Croissant Bread Pudding

    January 6, 2025

    A serving of bread pudding sits on a white plate garnished with fresh berrries and vanilla sauce

    Croissant Bread Pudding is a simple, decadent dessert made with creamy custard, flaky croissants, and a warm homemade vanilla sauce!

    A close up photo of a piece of bread pudding garnished with whipped cream, fresh berries and a drizzle of creamy vanilla sauce
    Croissant bread pudding

    Bread pudding is a pretty big deal around here. You may remember this original recipe for bread pudding. We’ve even made Donut Bread Pudding, Chocolate bread pudding, and Banana Bread Pudding. But now, buckle up for this version made with buttery croissants and a thick glorious vanilla sauce!

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    I think bread pudding might be my favorite dessert. Since the ingredients are easy to keep stocked in your kitchen, this is a good recipe for unexpected entertaining.

    Bread pudding is a great way to use stale bread and stale croissants (or any stale types of bread or buns) so it doesn’t get thrown away.

    This is one of those recipes that uses basic ingredients and no special tools or techniques. Oh, but when it is served, the scents of toasty baked croissants, cinnamon and vanilla will really wow your family and guests!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    You can pick up all the simple ingredients for this croissant bread pudding recipe at your local grocery store. In fact, I bet that you have most of them in your pantry and kitchen right now!

    Croissants, eggs, butter, milk, sugar, vanilla and cinnamon are displayed on a white marble background
    Ingredients

    How to Make Croissant Bread Pudding

    You can find the entire list of ingredients in the recipe card below. I’ve provided a few helpful notes about some of the key ingredients, below:

    • Large croissants – Cut into cubes (about 12 cups of croissant pieces)
    • Whole milk – 2%, skim, heavy cream, or half and half can also be used
    • Sugar – White, granulated sugar
    • Vanilla extract – pure vanilla is recommended, although imitation can be used if needed.

    For the Warm Vanilla Sauce

    • Whole milk – Whole is recommended for the right consistency but other types will work if needed.
    • Sugar – white granulated sugar

    Instructions

    1. Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F.
    2. Prepare a 19×13 baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Spread out the croissant cubes evenly in the dish. Set aside.
    3. Whisk the whole eggs in a large mixing bowl. Then, add the milk, sugar, vanilla extract, and spices and whisk until the sugar dissolves and the custard mixture is well combined.
    A 9x13 baking dish is filled with cubes of croissant
    Add croissant cubes
    A mixing bowl contains and egg and cream mixture with spices added, ready to be whisked
    Whisk the custard together
    1. Pour the custard mixture evenly over the croissant cubes. Use a spatula to gently toss the croissant pieces to ensure that they are all coated with the custard.
    A close up photo of a cinnamon egg and cream mixture being poured over a baking dish of cubed croissants
    Pour the custard over
    1. Let the bread pudding rest on the counter for 15 minutes so the custard is absorbed into the croissant pieces. Gently toss the bread mixture pudding again and let it rest for 15 more minutes.
    2. Bake for 50 minutes until the custard sets and the croissants are puffy and golden brown. Allow the bread pudding to cool slightly as you make the vanilla sauce.
    A spatula tosses cubed croissants in a rich egg and cream mixture in a white 9x13 baking dish
    Toss the croissant cubes
    A white 9x13 baking dish of baked croissant bread pudding is surrounded by fresh berries
    Bake until golden

    How to Make the Vanilla Sauce

    1. Cut the butter into 4 pieces to help it melt easier.
    2. Then, to a small saucepan over medium heat, add the butter, milk, sugar and vanilla extract. Stir occasionally until the butter has melted.
    3. Next, add one tablespoon of cornstarch and a pinch of salt. Remove the sauce from the heat and whisk until the cornstarch is dissolved and the sauce is smooth and glossy. If you prefer a thicker sauce, add up to one additional tablespoon of cornstarch, whisking to combine.
    The ingredients for a thick glossy vanilla sauce are combined in a small metal sauce pan
    Vanilla sauce ingredients
    A wooden spoon stirs a thick glossy vanilla sauce in a small metal sauce pan
    Stir or whisk until smooth
    1. Serve the bread pudding and drizzle the vanilla sauce over the top of the bread pudding. To make this simple dessert a special treat, garnish each serving with whipped cream and berries!
    Plates of bread pudding garnished with fresh berries, a small pitcher of vanilla sauce, a bowl of berries and forks are included in a welcoming breakfast spread
    Croissant Bread Pudding Slice

    Substitutions

    Croissant bread pudding with sauce is a simple but impressive dessert. We have a few suggestions so you can make this recipe right now with what you might have on hand.

    • Stale croissants or day-old croissants really soak up the creamy custard, but if you don’t have time, fresh croissants will still result in a delicious bread pudding.
    • For an even creamier custard, use a combination of whole milk, heavy cream or half and half.

    Variations

    We’ve got some fun ways to really take this bread pudding recipe over the top!

    • We used traditional butter croissants for this croissant bread and butter pudding, but you can use chocolate croissants or almond croissants.
    • While we topped the bread pudding with fruit, you can bake fresh berries right into the bread pudding! Toss one cup of fresh fruit in with the croissant cubes before baking.
    • Instead of vanilla sauce, serve this dessert bread pudding with maple syrup, a berry compote, caramel or chocolate sauce.
    • Sprinkle a few tablespoons of chocolate chips or pecan pieces to add texture and flavor to this dessert.
    • We love to garnish this warm pudding with fresh fruit or fresh berries like blueberries, blackberries and strawberries. Some other fruit options are sliced peaches, sliced bananas and even warmed fruit jam.
    • To really impress your family and guests, serve this dessert bread pudding with vanilla ice cream, too!

    How to Store Croissant Bread Pudding

    Keep leftovers stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    A serving of croissant bread pudding sits on a white plate garnished with vanilla sauce, whipped cream and fresh berries

    FAQs

    Does croissant bread pudding need to be refrigerated after baking?

    Since bread pudding is a pretty moist baked good and it contains dairy, we recommend refrigerating any leftovers.

    Can you eat bread and butter pudding cold?

    Sure! Since the custard mixture containing eggs and dairy is cooked thoroughly, it is safe to eat cold.

    How do you reheat croissant bread pudding?

    To reheat single servings of the bread pudding, microwave for one minute. If you need to reheat a larger portion, warm it in the oven, covered in aluminum foil, at 350 degrees F for 10-15 minutes or until warmed through.

    Related Recipes

    • Sliced lemon blueberry bread with lemon glaze.
      Lemon Blueberry Bread
    • Stack of homemade hush puppies on white plate, with one split open to show the inside.
      Hush Puppies
    • Sweet cornbread muffins stacked on a plate.
      Sweet Cornbread Recipe
    • Wooden spoon holding a serving of old-fashioned cornbread dressing.
      Old-Fashioned Cornbread Dressing

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    A serving of bread pudding sits on a white plate garnished with fresh berrries and vanilla sauce
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Croissant Bread Pudding

    Croissant Bread Pudding is a simple, delicious dessert made with creamy custard, flaky croissants and a warm homemade vanilla sauce!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 630kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    For the bread pudding

    • 7-9 croissants cubed (about 12 cups)
    • 5 large eggs
    • 3 cups whole milk
    • 1 cup granulated sugar
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
    • 2 teaspoons ground cinnamon `
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    To make the vanilla sauce

    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • ¾ cup whole milk
    • ½ cup granulated sugar
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1-2 tablespoons cornstarch
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt

    Instructions

    To make the croissant bread pudding

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
    • Prepare a 9×13 baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Spread out the croissant cubes evenly in the dish. Set aside.
    • Whisk the whole eggs in a large mixing bowl. Then, add the milk, sugar, vanilla extract and spices and whisk until the sugar dissolves and the custard mixture is well combined.
    • Pour the custard mixture evenly over the croissant cubes. Use a spatula to gently toss the croisssant pieces to make sure they are all coated with the custard.
    • Let the bread pudding rest on the counter for 15 minutes so the custard is absorbed into the croissant pieces. Gently toss the croissants and let it rest for 15 more minutes.
    • Bake for 50 minutes until the custard sets and the croissants are puffy and golden brown. Allow the bread pudding to cool slightly as you make the vanilla sauce.

    To prepare the vanilla sauce

    • Cut the butter into 4 pieces.
    • Then, to a small saucepan over medium heat, add the butter, milk, sugar and vanilla extract. Stir occasionally until the butter has melted.
    • Next, add one tablespoon of cornstarch and a pinch of salt. Remove the sauce from the heat and whisk until the cornstarch is dissolved and the sauce is smooth and glossy. If you prefer a thicker sauce, add up to one additional tablespoon of cornstarch, whisking to combine.
    • Serve the bread pudding with a drizzle of vanilla sauce. For a special treat, garnish each serving with whipped cream and fresh berries.

    Notes

    • I recommend chopping the croissants into cubes and letting them dry overnight. Stale croissants will result in the best texture for the bread pudding.
    • The 30 minute resting period (and the toss half-way through) helps all of the croissant pieces soak up the custard, so the resulting bread pudding is moist without being soggy.
    • For a creamier custard, use a combination of whole milk, heavy cream or half and half.
    • Keep leftovers stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 630kcal | Carbohydrates: 74g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 203mg | Sodium: 518mg | Potassium: 300mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 51g | Vitamin A: 1187IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 191mg | Iron: 2mg

    Loaded Baked Potato Soup Recipe

    January 5, 2025

    Loaded Potato Soup in small crock, next to fabric napkin.

    Loaded Baked Potato Soup: This easy soup recipe is comforting on a cool night and quick enough for a busy weeknight dinner.

    Easy Loaded Potato Soup Recipe Photo

    So… the grocery store had a sale on russet potatoes. With my bargain shopping and money-saving strategies I’ve been implementing lately, I totally took advantage of this deal. “Buy one 5 lb bag of potatoes for $2.99, get one free.” Say What!? Do you know how many meals/side dishes I can make with 2-5 lb bags of potatoes? This, my friend, is how this potato soup was born.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Soup Recipe

    • Simple ingredients – Even though this soup has tons of flavor, the ingredients are easy to find and you may even have most of them on hand.
    • Quick – This soup is ready in under 30 minutes so it’s a great option for a busy weeknight.
    • Large batch – Whether you’re feeding a crowd or making a recipe that you want to freeze for later, this potato soup is a crowd-pleaser and freezes great.

    Ingredients

    You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below but here are a few notes about key ingredients:

    • Potatoes – I use russet potatoes but you can also use red or yellow potatoes if that’s what you have on hand.
    • Chicken broth – You can use storebought or make your own homemade chicken broth or even broth out of a rotisserie chicken.
    • Bacon bits – Real, cooked bacon bit pieces can purchased but you can also make your own bacon and chop it in to fine pieces. I love cooking bacon in the air fryer for this recipe since it’s quick.
    • Ranch seasoning – The seasoning that comes in packets to make ranch dressing is recommended here. However, if you only have ranch dressing, that can work too. I’d start by adding ¼ cup of ranch dressing and adding more if desired.
    • Sour cream – Don’t buy sour cream just for this recipe since it uses such a little amount. Try using cream cheese instead.
    • Heavy cream – As with the sour cream, don’t buy a container of heavy cream just for this recipe. You can simply add a little more milk, or even a little butter if desired to help add depth to this soup.

    How to Make Loaded Potato Soup

    Just a few steps are required before letting this soup simmer on the stove to let the flavors come together.

    Cube the Potatoes:

    Easy Loaded Potato Soup Recipe Photo

    When you make potato soup, do you cut the potatoes up in to small chunks like this? Or do you leave them fairly large or mash them completely? I’ve had so many different versions of potato soup, and I can honestly say that I don’t really care how the texture of the soup is. But for this batch, I decided to cut them up in to about ½ in.-1 in. cubes.

    • Boil potatoes in water, in a large stock pot until tender.
    • Drain potatoes and return to pot.
    • Add in remaining ingredients, and let simmer for at least 10-15 minutes to let cook through.

    Tip: You can also boil potatoes in chicken broth instead of water for more flavor but reserve ½ chicken broth for the soup.

    Easy Loaded Potato Soup Recipe Photo

    FAQs

    What is loaded potato soup made of?

    Baking potatoes, cheese, bacon, sour cream, spices, milk and heavy cream come together to create a creamy, flavorful, comforting soup.

    How do you thicken loaded baked potato soup?

    Making a roux for a soup can thicken it. You can do this by mixing together 1 tablespoon of flour and 1 tablespoon of cold water, then whisk it in to the soup and allow it to heat through and thicken until desired consistency. Tip: Adding a tablespoon of soup to the roux before adding it to the pot of soup can help make sure there aren’t clumps.

    Do you have to peel potatoes for potato soup?

    You don’t have to, and leaving the peels on can help potatoes stay more firm in the soup.

    What to Serve with This Soup

    This house salad recipe and these fluffy cheese biscuits go amazing with this loaded baked potato soup! They’re both easy and round out the meal wonderfully!

    Related Recipes

    If you love creamy soups like this loaded baked potato soup, then you can’t miss out on this creamy clam chowder (It also uses potatoes)! Or, if you like a little spice, this buffalo chicken soup is a family favorite.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Loaded Potato Soup in small crock, next to fabric napkin.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Loaded Baked Potato Soup Recipe

    This loaded baked potato soup recipe is so easy to make and is full of comforting ingredients. Best of all it can be made in under 30 minutes.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 461kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 6 pounds russet potatoes
    • ½ cup chicken broth
    • ½ cup heavy whipping cream
    • 2 cups whole milk
    • 1 Tablespoon onion powder
    • 1 Tablespoon garlic powder
    • ⅓ cup sour cream
    • ¼ cup parmesan cheese
    • 1 cup real bacon bits
    • 1 package ranch seasoning
    • salt and pepper to taste

    Instructions

    • Wash, peel, and cut potatoes into small ½ inch cubes or so.
    • Boil potatoes in water, in a large stock pot until tender.
    • Drain potatoes and return to pot.
    • Add in remaining ingredients, and let simmer for at least 10-15 minutes to let cook through.

    Notes

    Tip: Potato soup can have a chunky texture or smooth. If you prefer a smoother texture, mash the cooked potatoes before adding all of the ingredients together.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 461kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 47mg | Sodium: 404mg | Potassium: 1627mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 400IU | Vitamin C: 20.6mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 3.2mg

    Air Fryer Brats

    January 5, 2025

    Bratwursts cooked in the air fryer, resting on a plate.

    Air Fryer Brats: Cooking brats in the air fryer is easy, and it leaves them with a golden, crisp outer edge and a juicy flavor!

    Bratwursts that were cooked in the air fryer, resting on a plate.

    Brats only take about 10 minutes in a 400° air fryer, so dinner or lunch is on the table in a flash! Cooking brats on the stove takes about 25 minutes, so a bit longer, but it’s definitely an option. Or, if you prefer, cooking brats in the oven is another option.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Want to Cook Brats in the Air Fryer

    Sure, cooking brats in the oven is easy. But for some reason, using the air fryer almost feels easier… and perhaps it’s because you don’t have to heat up the entire oven just for a small batch of brats.

    And honestly, I almost feel silly calling this a “recipe” since it’s so stinking easy. You open the package of brats, put them in the air fryer, and then eat them. That’s it!

    But it IS helpful to know how long to cook brats in the air fryer and what temperature to cook them at, AND to see what kinds of toppings you can have for brats, so I decided it was necessary to create this “recipe.”

    Cooking Raw Brats in the Air Fryer

    Now for this recipe, I’m using raw, or uncooked, brats from the grocery store.

    Can you reheat pre-cooked or leftover sausages (brats)? You bet… it won’t take as long, but it’s definitely the way I re-heat them. For some reason, it’s so much better in the air fryer!

    Now, if you ask me, my favorite brats are the flavored brats… and I’m talking the brats that you can’t get at the grocery store. I love finding hole-in-the-wall butcher shops to see if they offer out-of-the-box flavors in uncooked brats like: chipotle brats, or something fun like maple and brown sugar.

    More Air Fryer Recipes You’ll Love:

    • Air Fryer Apple Chips
    • Air Fryer Burgers
    • Air Fryer Bacon

    How to Cook Brats in the Air Fryer

    Depending on your air fryer model, some say to preheat before cooking. But let’s get real, I’m cooking brats, not a gourmet soufflé. So I just place them in the basket and get to cooking.

    How long do you cook brats in the air fryer?

    When I don’t preheat my air fryer, I like to cook them at 400° for about 10 minutes. (Or until the internal temperature reaches 160°.)

    NOTE: If you preheat your air fryer, your cooking time may not be as long.

    Chefman Air Fryer Brats

    “Do I Have to Flip Brats in the Air Fryer?”

    You don’t have to but if you can, it does help it cook through more evenly. But I’ll say… my Chefman air fryer is a boss and it rarely fails me if I forget to flip. But for those who use an air fryer/toaster oven combo… it may be more ideal to flip the brats after 5 minutes.

    Johnsonville Brats

    Johnsonville is the standard in our house unless we visit a butcher shop and get a fun, local flavor.

    Johnsonville has a lot of different flavors of brats and sausages that we like to rotate through, like:

    • Irish O’Garlic
    • Hot & Spicy
    • Cheddar & Bacon
    • … and they have more fun flavors!

    For today’s recipe, we’re sticking with the Original brats. But if you have Italian sausages to cook, we love cooking those sausages in the oven too!

    Johnsonville Brats Recipe

    “Do I Need to use cooking spray for the air fryer?”

    Most air fryer manuals say not to us cooking spray on the baskets because it can damage the coating… so I never spray mine. And for brats, I never have a problem with them sticking.

    But if you do have problems with food sticking, you can try using parchment paper! This may mess with the texture of foods frying (since air won’t be able to freely circulate like it does without it) but it’s worth a try!

    Place brats in air fryer basket

    Look at those beauties after 10 minutes! They’re plump, juicy, and ready to fall onto a brat bun with your favorite toppings!

    Cooked brats in air fryer

    Tips for Cooking Brats

    • I absolutely LOVE making a package (or two) of brats on a Sunday evening so we can eat them all week for lunch or a last-minute dinner idea.

      Granted… it only takes 10 minutes to cook them from raw, but my boys and husband see cooked brats in the fridge and for some reason, they think it’s easier to grab and go!
    • If eating brats on a bun isn’t your style, or if you’re trying to do low-carb or keto, eating them plain, and slicing them in to small circles is a great way to eat them. Dip them in a fun sauce like horseradish mustard, bbq sauce or a butter-garlic aioli
    Brats in air fryer

    Bratwurst Topping Ideas

    When I was taking photos for this post, I didn’t have any of my favorite toppings for brats on hand.

    But you know what, this is a post about how to cook brats in the air fryer anyway, not “brat topping ideas.”

    However, I’m going to go out on a limb here (a very short one) and say that you’d like some ideas to fancy up your brat life, am I right? So I’ll give you some of our favorite toppings to solidify your brat-making experience here.

    Brat (and Sausage) Toppings:

    • Sauerkraut (Fun fact: I ate 3 foot-long brats with sauerkraut on them at a Cardinals baseball game 15 years ago and I wasn’t miserable and could have gone for a 4th.)
    • Onions (Get fancy and saute onions in butter for a punch of flavor that will have the neighbor’s husband running over to see what that glorious smell is – so close the windows so that doesn’t happen. Who needs more men begging for dinner?)
    • Peppers – (See above note. Saute… close the windows.)
    • Spicy Mustard
    • BBQ Sauce
    • Jalapenos
    • Nacho Cheese
    • Pizza Sauce (and add mozzarella cheese for a pizza brat/dog)
    • Crumbled bacon
    • Mac & Cheese
    • …. and see my Hot Dog Bar for more fun ideas!
    Brats in air fryer

    More Oven-Based Recipes

    I love easy-to-make meals like this one, which leaves room for customizing. Here are other recipes you’ll love that are quick, simple, and fun to customize:

    • Pork Steaks in the Oven are so easy; just season and sauce for delicious, tender, and juicy pork steaks.
    • Hot Dogs in the Oven turn out to be delicious on the outside and juicy on the inside.
    • How to Cook Breakfast Sausage in the Oven takes just 12 minutes for juicy, tender sausage without the mess.
    • How to Cook Sausage Patties in the Oven is a hassle-free, delicious way to cook sausage patties.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Bratwursts cooked in the air fryer, resting on a plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 7 votes

    Easy Air Fryer Brats

    Air Fryer Brats: Cooking raw brats only takes about 10 minutes in a 400° air fryer, creating juicy brats and it gets dinner on the table in a flash!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 brats
    Calories 220kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • air fryer

    Ingredients

    • 5 brats raw, uncooked
    • Toppings Desired See post for ideas!

    Instructions

    • Place brats in a single layer in the fryer basket.
    • Cook at 400° for 10 minutes (flip half way through) or until internal temperature of brats reach 160°. (See notes.)

    Notes

    Air fryers can vary with cook times and temperatures, depending on the brand and style. It’s always best to test and watch the food you’re cooking carefully to make sure yours doesn’t cook faster/stronger than what mine may.
    Also, make sure to check the internal temperature of the brats to make sure they reach 160° before consuming.
    Make a package (or two) of brats at a time and leave them in the refrigerator for an easy to reheat snack, lunch or dinner.
    If eating brats on a bun isn’t your style, or if you’re trying to do low-carb or keto, eating them plain, and slicing them in to small circles is a great way to eat them. Dip them in a fun sauce like horseradish mustard, bbq sauce, or a butter-garlic aioli

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1brat | Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 558mg | Potassium: 230mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

    If you enjoyed this post, be sure to follow me on Instagram, Facebook, Pinterest and YouTube! Share a photo of your recipe and use the hashtag #Fantabulosity so I can find it and follow along!

    Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel (Creamy, Cheesy Comfort Food Classic)

    December 28, 2024

    Chicken spaghetti in baking dish, being lifted out with serving spoon.

    This Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel is the ultimate creamy, cheesy comfort food! Shredded chicken, Rotel tomatoes, and topped with cheddar cheese, it's a quick and easy dinner your family will love.

    Chicken spaghetti with Rotel being lifted out of the baking dish.

    Recipe Highlights

    • Quick and easy: Ready in about 45 minutes, perfect for busy weeknights
    • Creamy and cheesy: A rich, comforting sauce made with simple pantry ingredients
    • Feeds a crowd: Great for potlucks, family dinners, or when you need something filling
    • Make-ahead friendly: Easy to assemble ahead and bake when ready
    • Classic comfort food: A baked chicken spaghetti casserole that always gets requested again

    Perfect for weeknights or when you need a satisfying, crowd-pleasing meal, and ready in 45 minutes!

    Pasta recipes like this Rotel Pasta, Hamburger Mac and Cheese, and Chicken Alfredo Lasagna are all comfort food recipes that are easy to make and family-friendly. This chicken spaghetti with Rotel is another dinner recipe to add to the rotation.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Chicken Spaghetti?

    Chicken spaghetti is a classic baked pasta casserole made with shredded chicken, spaghetti noodles, and a creamy, cheesy sauce. It's especially popular in Southern kitchens and church cookbooks, where simple ingredients come together to feed a crowd.

    There are a lot of variations, but most versions include cooked chicken, pasta, canned soups, and cheese, all baked together until hot and bubbly.

    This version uses Rotel tomatoes to add a little extra flavor and just the right amount of kick, balancing out the richness of the sauce.

    If you've never had it before, think of it as a creamy, baked chicken pasta that's hearty, comforting, and perfect for sharing.

    Ingredients Needed

    Ingredients for chicken spaghetti with Rotel.

    You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. I’ve provided notes about some of the key ingredients below.

    • Cheddar Cheese: Try Colby Jack or Monterey Jack for a different twist.
    • Chicken: You can boil chicken breasts for this recipe, cook chicken breasts in the slow cooker, bake, or even cook the chicken on the stove-top. Or, you can also use a rotisserie chicken. Make this rotisserie chicken stock after!
    • Chicken Broth: If you don’t have chicken broth on hand, and you want to make your own homemade chicken broth, that’s an option as well.

    How to Make Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel

    Step 1: Preheat the oven to 350°F.

    You’ll also want to boil spaghetti noodles and drain them before assembling the chicken spaghetti.

    Soups and wet ingredients combined in mixing bowl.
    Step 2: Combine soups, cream, broth, Rotel and seasonings.
    Chicken, noodles, cheese in mixing bowl.
    Step 3: Add chicken, 1 cup cheese, and spaghetti noodles.
    Chicken spaghetti in baking dish.
    Step 4: Pour spaghetti in to prepared baking dish.
    Shredded cheese on top of chicken spaghetti in baking dish.
    Step 5: Sprinkle remaining cheese on top.
    Baked chicken spaghetti in baking dish.
    Step 6: Bake for 30-35 minutes.

    Tips for the Best Chicken Spaghetti

    • Cook the pasta just to al dente so it doesn't become mushy after baking
    • Melt cheeses slowly so the sauce stays smooth and creamy
    • Cut the cream cheese into cubes so it melts evenly
    • Shred chicken into bite-sized pieces so it mixes evenly throughout
    • If the sauce feels too thick, add a splash of reserved pasta water
    • Don't add extra salt right away becauses the cheeses and canned ingredients already contain plenty
    Cooked chicken spaghetti in plate, with fork digging a bite out.

    If you love easy comfort food like this, you may also enjoy your crockpot sausage casserole, chicken and rice casserole, or other old-fashioned dinner recipes.

    FAQs

    Can I use a different type of pasta for chicken spaghetti?

    Yes, fettuccine, penne, or rotini would work well if you don't have spaghetti.

    Can I make chicken spaghetti ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Assemble the chicken spaghetti casserole, cover, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. Bake when ready.

    What is another name for chicken spaghetti?

    It may also be called tetrazzini which is what chicken and spaghetti together is also called in America.

    How to Serve This at a Potluck

    This chicken spaghetti casserole is perfect for potlucks and gatherings because it holds up well and stays creamy.

    • Transporting: Cover tightly with foil and keep warm until serving
    • Keeping warm: Place in a low oven (around 200°F) or on a warming tray
    • Serving size: One 9×13 dish typically feeds about 6-8 people
    • Buffet tip: Give it a quick stir before serving if it's been sitting to keep the sauce creamy

    It's one of those dishes people go back for seconds on, so don't expect leftovers.

    Can You Make Chicken Spaghetti Ahead of Time?

    Yes, this is a great make-ahead recipe.

    You can assemble the casserole up to a day in advance and store it covered in the refrigerator. When you're ready to bake, add the shredded cheese on top and bake as directed.

    If baking straight from the fridge, you may need to add a few extra minutes to the cooking time so it heats through completely.

    Storage

    Leftovers: Chicken Spaghetti Casserole should be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    To Reheat: Warm in the oven at 350°F for 15-20 minutes or microwave until heated through.

    To Freeze: Assemble the casserole without baking and freeze tightly wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before baking.

    Variations of Chicken Spaghetti

    There are plenty of ways to customize this chicken spaghetti depending on what you have on hand.

    • Spicy version: Use hot Rotel or add red pepper flakes or jalapeños
    • Extra creamy: Stir in more cream cheese or a splash of heavy cream
    • Different protein: Swap the chicken for ground beef or turkey
    • Add vegetables: Bell peppers, mushrooms, or onions work well
    • Change the cheese: Try Monterey Jack, Colby Jack, or a Mexican blend

    This flexibility is one of the reasons chicken spaghetti casseroles are such a staple in old-fashioned recipes.

    What to Serve with Chicken Spaghetti

    As with most pasta dishes, a side salad pairs wonderfully with the dish. Or, slices of Italian white bread, or this cheesy pull-apart bread are also great options.

    For more comforting chicken meals and family favorites, browse these old-fashioned comfort dinners.

    Related Recipes

    • A fork holding a bite of fried spaghetti.
      Fried Spaghetti
    • Close up of venison spaghetti in
      Venison Spaghetti
    • Chicken Bolognese on spaghetti noodles.
      Chicken Bolognese Recipe
    • Crockpot Chicken Pasta on wooden spoon.
      Crockpot Chicken Pasta

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chicken spaghetti in baking dish, being lifted out with serving spoon.
    Print Pin
    4.63 from 8 votes

    Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel

    Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel: Topped with cheese, baked in the oven, this casserole is a family favorite, that uses simple ingredients and ready in under and hour.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 536kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups cooked chicken shredded
    • 8 ounces cooked spaghetti noodles
    • 10.5 ounce can cream of chicken soup
    • 10.5 ounce can cream of mushroom soup
    • 1 cup sour cream
    • 1 cup chicken broth
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 10 ounce can Rotel tomatoes drained (or your favorite brand of diced tomatoes with green chilies)
    • 2 cups shredded cheddar cheese divided

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.
    • Cook the spaghetti in a large pot of salted water until al dente. Drain and set aside.
      8 ounces cooked spaghetti noodles
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the chicken broth, sour cream, cream of chicken soup, cream of mushroom soup, drained Rotel tomatoes, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper.
      10.5 ounce can cream of chicken soup, 10.5 ounce can cream of mushroom soup, 1 cup sour cream, 1 cup chicken broth, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 1 teaspoon onion powder, ½ teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper, 10 ounce can Rotel tomatoes
    • Stir in the cooked chicken, drained spaghetti, and 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese until evenly combined.
      2 cups cooked chicken, 2 cups shredded cheddar cheese
    • Pour the mixture into the prepared baking dish and spread evenly.
    • Sprinkle the remaining 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese over the top.
    • Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and the casserole is bubbly.
    • Let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.

    Video

    Notes

    To Make Ahead: Assemble the chicken spaghetti, cover, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. Bake when ready.
    Leftovers: Chicken Spaghetti Casserole should be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
    To Freeze:  You can assemble the casserole, but don’t bake it yet. Let it cool completely, cover it tightly, and freeze. When ready to bake, thaw overnight in the refrigerator, then bake as directed. If baking from frozen, add about 20–30 minutes to the bake time and cover loosely with foil until heated through.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 536kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 103mg | Sodium: 1340mg | Potassium: 461mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 782IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 346mg | Iron: 3mg

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    December 26, 2024

    Waffle breakfast sandwich on plate.

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches: Crispy bacon, melty cheese, fluffy scrambled eggs drizzled with syrup, piled on warm crispy waffles, makes for a new delicious and easy breakfast idea!

    Waffle breakfast sandwich on plate.

    Breakfast sandwiches can be easy to make, using simple ingredients and are great for meal planning and freezing for a quick breakfast.

    This bacon egg and cheese sandwich is similar, using brioche buns instead of waffles. Or, for the same breakfast sandwich vibe, this fried bologna and egg sandwich or this pineapple and ham breakfast sandwich, are both fun twists to a traditional breakfast sandwich.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Highlights

    • A Fun Twist: Breakfast sandwiches can be a great, easy breakfast idea but the same sandwich can get old. Inspired by my waffle burger, instead of using regular bread, using toasty waffles adds a different texture and flavor to this common breakfast sandwich.
    • Easy to Make: A quick prep time and easy assembly, make this recipe a great choice for a grab-and-go option for even to make for a large crowd if hosting.
    • Presentation: If hosting a brunch, these breakfast sandwiches look amazing and guests love how different they are, since waffles are serving as the “bun” in this sandwich. Tip: Wrap the bottom half of the sandwiches in parchment paper to help hold them together to make them easier to hold, and to give them a classy look. Or, go with the waffle charcuterie idea, and allow guests to do a build-your-own breakfast sandwich.

    Ingredients

    The ingredients are simple for this recipe but I’ve provided some notes below about some of the key ingredients.

    Labeled ingredients for waffle breakfast sandwiches.
    • Waffles – For added variety, use flavored waffles like fluffy blueberry waffles or Belgian chocolate chip waffles. Or, for some added flair, these rainbow waffles are a colorful way to add fun to waffle breakfast sandwiches.
    • Cheese – For a different flavor profile, swap American cheese for cheddar or Swiss. Double the cheese for extra cheesy goodness! 
    • Bacon – There are many different ways you can cook bacon for this recipe. Cooking bacon in the oven is my favorite but you can also cook bacon in the air fryer for a faster method. You can also use turkey bacon cooked in the oven for this recipe as well.

    How to Make Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    Eggs, pepper and milk in a mixing bowl.
    Step 1: Begin by whipping eggs, milk and spices for scrambled eggs.
    Scrambled eggs made, with slices of American cheese on top.
    Step 2: Cook eggs in skillet and top with slices of cheese.
    Cooked bacon slices on top of waffles.
    Step 3: Layer cooked bacon on to cooked waffles.
    Eggs with melted cheese on top of bacon slices.
    Step 4: Top bacon with scrambled eggs with cheese.
    Waffles on top of eggs, cheese and bacon.

    Step 5: Top sandwich with another waffle. (Optional: Drizzle syrup on top of scrambled eggs before topping with second waffle if desired.)

    Syrup being drizzled on waffle breakfast sandwich.

    Recipe Tips

    • Cooking Waffles – A toaster is a great way to quickly make waffles. You can also cook frozen waffles in the air fryer. Then, if desired, heat the oven to 200 degrees and place the toasted waffles on a sheet pan to keep them warm while you prepare the rest of the sandwich. 
    • Crispy Bacon – Making sure the bacon is crispy, is key. It makes the sandwich easier to bite in to since the bacon breaks aways instead of pulls out.
    • Kid-Friendly – Mini waffles can also be used to create bite-sized sandwiches perfect for little hands.
    • Additional Sandwich Options – Want more? You can also layer on cooked frozen hashbrown patties, or even cooked sausage patties.

    How to Store Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    • Leftover Sandwiches: Wrap assembled sandwiches tightly in foil and store them in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Reheat in the oven at 350°F for 10 minutes.
    • Make-Ahead: Prepare bacon and scrambled eggs in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Assemble the sandwiches just before serving for the best texture.
    • Freezer Friendly: Assemble the sandwiches, allow them to cool and then wrap in aluminum foil, or my favorite, the “Press ‘n Seal” wrap and then store in a freezer-safe bag for up to 3 months. When you're ready to eat them, unwrap then pop them on a baking sheet for 5 to 10 minutes at 350 degrees F.

    FAQs

    How to make the viral waffle house sandwich?

    Layer shredded hashbrowns, sausage, scrambled eggs, cheese and bacon between two waffles and drizzle with maple syrup.

    What are breakfast sandwich topping ideas?

    Bacon, sausage, ham, fried chicken, egg, cheese, avocado, peppers, and spinach, are great breakfas sandwich ideas.

    Similar Recipes

    • A close up photo of a stack of breakfast slider sandwiches
      Hawaiian Roll Breakfast Sliders
    • Mini bagel breakfast sliders stacked on top of one another on a white plate.
      Bagel Breakfast Sliders
    • Fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich, sliced on white plate.
      Fried Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich
    • Close up of peanut butter and jelly sandwich
      How to Make a Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Waffle breakfast sandwich on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches - these easy breakfast sandwiches take classic breakfast staples and combine them into a fun out-of-the-box breakfast idea.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 sandwiches
    Calories 529kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 8 waffles store-bought frozen works great
    • 8 eggs
    • 2 tablespoons milk
    • 2 tablespoons butter
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt or to taste
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper or to taste
    • 8 slices cooked bacon crispy – See how to cook bacon
    • 4 slices American cheese
    • pancake syrup optional, for drizzling

    Instructions

    • Toast the waffles until they are golden brown and crisp. Set aside on a plate.
    • Cook the bacon in a skillet over medium heat until crispy. Transfer to a paper towel-lined plate to drain the excess grease.
    • In a mixing bowl, crack 8 large eggs and add 2 tablespoons of 2% milk, 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon ground black pepper. Using a whisk or fork, beat the mixture briskly until the yolks and whites are fully blended and the surface appears slightly bubbly. This step incorporates air into the eggs, which helps achieve a light and fluffy texture when cooked. 
    • Heat a nonstick skillet over medium-low heat. Add 2 tablespoons unsalted butter and let it melt gently, coating the bottom of the pan. Pour the whisked eggs into the pan. Let them sit undisturbed for a few seconds until the edges begin to set.
    • Using a silicone spatula, gently push the eggs from the edges toward the center. Stir in a circular motion to create soft curds. Be careful not to over-stir, as this will break the texture. When the eggs are mostly set but still slightly wet, place four slices of American cheese over the eggs in four sections and heat until melted. Remove from heat and use your spatula to section the eggs into four equal portions.
    • Lay one waffle on a plate as the base. Place 2 slices of crispy bacon on the waffle. Top with 1 portion of fluffy scrambled eggs with cheese. Drizzle with pancake syrup if desired. Finish with a second toasted waffle on top. Repeat for all 4 waffle sandwiches.
    • Serve immediately while warm. Add extra syrup on the side for dipping.

    Notes

    Bacon Tip: Making sure your bacon is crispy, makes the sandwich easier to bite in to and eat.
    Freezer Friendly: Assemble the sandwiches, allow them to cool and then wrap in aluminum foil, or my favorite, the “Press ‘n Seal” wrap and then store in a freezer-safe bag for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to eat them, unwrap then pop them on a baking sheet for 5 to 10 minutes at 350 degrees F.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 529kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 398mg | Sodium: 1784mg | Potassium: 306mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1933IU | Calcium: 445mg | Iron: 6mg

    Crock Pot Cube Steak

    December 24, 2024

    Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting on white plate.

    Crock Pot Cube Steak: an easy dinner recipe, that takes just 5 minutes to prep in the slow cooker! This recipe combines the simpleness of a slow cooker recipe with the rich, hearty flavors of cube steak and traditional seasonings.

    Can’t get enough steak recipes in the slow cooker? This slow cooker London broil steak, is similar to this cube steak recipe, and one of the easiest recipes out there!

    Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting in front of slow cooker.

    Much like our oven-baked steak, or even our slow cooker pork steaks, the result of this recipe is succulently tender, delightfully flavorful, and wonderfully comforting, making it an exceptional choice for both weeknight dinners and special occasions the whole family will love. 

    Inspired to try more crock pot recipes?  Crock Pot Chicken Enchiladas are always a popular option in our house and are simple to make for even the fussiest eater. Or if you want a delicious, cheesy recipe to go with a meat dish, try some Crock Pot Cheesy Hashbrowns.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only 4 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
    • Very simple recipe: Using pre-mixed soup, this is a simple recipe that doesn’t need a lot of ingredients or cooking experience.
    • Slow cooker comfort food: You can set this up in your slow cooker for a great comfort food option with little hands-on work needed.

    What is Cube Steak?

    Cube steak, also known as minute steak due to its quick cooking time, is a cut of beef that has been tenderized, typically using an electric meat tenderizer or a manual meat mallet. The process of tenderization leaves distinctive cube-shaped indentations on the meat, hence the name “cube steak”. 

    This cut is usually lean and somewhat tough, making it a perfect candidate for slow cooking methods like braising or slow cooking in a crock pot, which allow the meat to become tender and flavorful over time, much like when we make chuck roast in the slow cooker for these shredded beef tacos.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for Crock Pot cube steak on white counter.
    • Steak – You’ll need around 1.5 to 2 pounds of cube steak for this recipe. If you only have ground beef, you’ll love this Salisbury steak recipe!
    • Soup mix – I find a Beefy Onion soup mix is the perfect one to give the steak flavor.
    • Mushroom soup – Get the creaminess needed for the dish from two cans of cream of mushroom soup.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions can be necessary. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Beefy Onion Soup Mix: You can make your own mix at home using dried onion flakes, beef bouillon granules, onion powder, parsley, celery seed, paprika, and black pepper. Another option is to use a combination of vegetable broth and onion powder or minced onions for a similar flavor.
    • Cream of Mushroom Soup: You can substitute with cream of celery soup or cream of chicken soup if you’re looking for a similar texture. If you’d like to avoid canned soup, you can make a homemade white sauce with butter, flour, and milk, then add sautéed mushrooms.
    • Beef Broth: You can swap it with vegetable or chicken broth. You could also use a broth made from a beef bouillon cube or granules if you still want the beef flavor but don’t have the broth on hand.

    Variations

    Here are some variations you might want to try for your crock pot cube steak recipe:

    • Italian Style: Use a packet of Italian dressing mix instead of the Beefy Onion soup mix, and substitute the cream of mushroom soup with marinara sauce. Add in some bell peppers and onions for extra flavor.
    • Creamy Garlic and Herb: Substitute the Beefy Onion soup mix with a blend of dried herbs like rosemary, thyme, and oregano. Use a can of cream of garlic soup instead of cream of mushroom, and consider adding some chopped fresh herbs near the end of cooking.
    • Spicy Mexican: Swap the Beefy Onion soup mix for a packet of taco seasoning, and use enchilada sauce or salsa instead of the cream of mushroom soup. You could also add some canned green chilies or jalapenos for an extra kick.
    • Sweet and Tangy BBQ: Instead of the Beefy Onion soup mix, use your favorite barbecue spice rub. Substitute the cream of mushroom soup with your favorite barbecue sauce, and consider adding a touch of apple cider vinegar for tanginess.

    How to Make Crock Pot Cube Steak

    This cube steak recipe is broken into 2 components:

    • Prepare the ingredients
    • Cook the recipe

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Mix the ingredients. Combine the soup, broth, and Onion Soup Mix until well blended. (Image 1)

    STEP 2: Add the steak to the crock pot. Place the cubed steak in the slow cooker, being mindful not to overlap them excessively. (Image 2)

    Steps 1-4 Crock Pot cube steaks.

    STEP 3: Add the sauce mixture. Pour the soup mixture evenly over the cube steak. (Image 3)

    STEP 4: Cook the recipe. Place the lid on and cook on high for a duration of 3 hours. (Image 4)

    Slow cooked cubed steak on top of mashed potatoes, on white plate.
    Cooked Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, on white plate.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Cube Steak: For a delectable meal, ensure your cube steak is thoroughly dried before adding it to the crock pot to prevent excess moisture.
    • Seasoning: Don’t skimp on seasoning; season your steak generously before cooking cube steak to enhance the flavor.
    • Layering: When layering your cube steaks in the crock pot, try not to overlap them too much. This ensures even cooking.
    • Cooking Time: Remember, slow and steady wins the race. For the most tender cube steak, opt for a longer cooking time on a lower setting.
    • Resting Time: Let the steak rest for a few minutes after cooking. This allows the juices to be redistributed, resulting in a moist and flavorful steak.
    Bite of Crock Pot cube steak on fork, above plate of mashed potatoes.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use a different type of steak for this recipe?

    Yes, you can substitute the cube steak with other tender cuts of beef, such as a ribeye or top sirloin. However, keep in mind that the texture and flavor may differ slightly due to the differences in fat content and marbling.

    Can I add vegetables directly into the crock pot?

    Absolutely! Vegetables like carrots, potatoes, or bell peppers can be added directly into the crock pot. Just ensure they are cut into larger pieces to prevent them from overcooking.

    Can I make this recipe in an Instant Pot instead?

    Yes, this recipe can be adapted for an Instant Pot. However, the cooking time will need to be adjusted accordingly as the Instant Pot cooks much faster than a traditional slow cooker.

    Can I cook the cube steak on a stovetop instead?

    Yes, this recipe can be prepared on a stovetop. Fry the cube steaks in a pan over medium heat until browned on both sides, then add the soup mixture and simmer until the steak is tender and the sauce has thickened.

    Can you cook raw steak in a crock pot?

    Absolutely! You can definitely cook raw steak in a crock pot. Slow cookers are designed to cook food over a long period of time, which makes them ideal for tenderizing tougher cuts of meat like steak. The low and slow cooking process allows the steak to become wonderfully tender while absorbing the flavors of the sauce and seasonings. Just remember, always cook the steak on low for an extended period to ensure that it is both safe to eat and deliciously tender.

    What to Serve with Crock Pot Cube Steak

    The beauty of Crock Pot Cube Steak is that it pairs well with a variety of side dishes. Here are some suggestions:

    1. Mashed Potatoes: The classic comfort food side, mashed potatoes pair perfectly with the hearty cube steak. Their creaminess complements the steak and savory gravy.
    2. Steamed Vegetables: A simple side of steamed vegetables such as broccoli, carrots, or green beans can provide a much-needed fresh counterpart to the rich cube steak.
    3. Rice: Whether it’s brown, wild or white rice, this versatile grain is excellent at soaking up the delicious gravy of the cube steak.
    4. Bread Rolls: A warm, crusty bread roll would be excellent for sopping up any leftover gravy on your plate.
    5. Salad: A light garden salad with a tangy vinaigrette can help cut through the richness of the cube steak dish and add a refreshing element to your meal.

    Storage

    Allow the steak and gravy to cool completely before storing. This prevents condensation from forming in the storage container, which can lead to a diluted gravy. Transfer the cooled steak and gravy to an airtight container. Refrigerate for up to 3-4 days.

    When you’re ready to enjoy the leftover cube steak, warm them up in a saucepan over medium heat or in the microwave until heated through.

    Freezing leftovers is also possible. After the steak and gravy have completely cooled, portion them into freezer-safe container or resealable plastic bags in the serving sizes you prefer. To eat, thaw the steak and gravy in the refrigerator overnight before reheating in a saucepan or microwave.

    More Steak Recipes You’ll Love

    Salisbury steak with gravy is a similar recipe to cube steak and gravy, that you’ll want to add to your favorite old-fashioned dinner menu, along with these…

    • steak bites in white dish with butter on top
      The BEST Steak Bites
    • Deer steaks on platter topped with butter and parsley.
      Deer Steak Recipe – On the Stovetop
    • Baked BBQ Pork Steaks on white plate
      Pork Steaks in the Oven
    • Sliced of venison that was cooked with a deer marinade.
      Venison Marinade + Grilled Deer Steak Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting on white plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Crock Pot Cube Steak

    Crock Pot Cube Steak: Using only 4 ingredients, this dump-and-go recipe is a great dinner idea that's flavorful, so tender, easy and hearty for the family.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 hours hours
    Total Time 3 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 steaks
    Calories 143kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 pack cube steaks probably 1.5-2 pounds – about 3-4 steaks
    • 1 package Beefy Onion Soup Mix
    • 2 cans cream of mushroom soup
    • 1 cup beef broth

    Instructions

    • Mix soup, broth and Onion Soup Mix together until evenly mixed together.
    • Arrange cube steaks on bottom of slow cooker, trying not to overlap too much.
    • Pour soup mixture over cube steak.
    • Cover with lid and cook on high for 3 hours.
    • Serve over mashed potatoes or egg noodles.

    Notes

    Tips:
    • When layering your cube steaks in the crock pot, try not to overlap them too much. This ensures even cooking.
    • Feel free to add vegetables like carrots, potatoes, or bell peppers. They can be added directly into the crock pot. Just ensure they are cut into larger pieces to prevent them from overcooking.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1steak | Calories: 143kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 2248mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 2IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg

    Cinnamon Roll Casserole

    December 22, 2024

    slice of cinnamon roll casserole on plate

    An easy Cinnamon Roll Casserole that’s perfect for breakfast, made of cinnamon roll pieces, butter, cinnamon, vanilla, heavy cream, syrup and eggs!

    cinnamon roll casserole on white plate

    If you love cinnamon, you’ll also love to see how we make cinnamon rolls in the air fryer, this cinnamon coffee cake recipe, and this vintage supper cake.

    Why You’ll Love this Recipe

    Oh heavens. Your Saturday morning is going to be complete with this easy breakfast recipe. But specifically, here’s why you’ll love this one:

    • This recipe is made using refrigerated cinnamon rolls! YES! We love shortcuts in the kitchen (like when we used crescent rolls for this biscuit and gravy casserole) and this recipe is no exception!
    • You can also make this recipe ahead of time and I give instructions and tips on how to do that below!
    slice of cinnamon roll casserole on white plate with baking dish in back

    Ingredient Notes

    By using canned cinnamon rolls, it really cuts down on the other simple ingredients for this recipe!

    labeled ingredients for cinnamon roll casserole, on counter
    • unsalted butter – You can use salted butter too, and it turns out just fine!
    • canned cinnamon rolls – We used Pillsbury cinnamon rolls but any brand/type will do, and either the original icing or cream cheese icing works great as well.

    To skip right to the recipe card where you can find the ingredients and instructions for this easy recipe, just scroll down to the bottom of this post and there you’ll find where you can print and gather all of the info that you need!

    Step by Step Directions

    1. First, preheat the oven to 375 degrees and lightly spray an 8×8 baking pan.
    2. Then start breaking the cinnamon rolls in to small pieces and place in to greased baking dish.
    small pieces of cinnamon rolls in dish
    Break cinnamon rolls in to pieces
    Melted butter pouring on top
    Pour melted butter on top
    1. In a medium bowl, beat together the eggs, heavy cream, cinnamon, and vanilla until combined well.
    heavy cream pouring in bowl with eggs
    Pour heavy cream in eggs
    Cinnamon pouring in to bowl
    Add cinnamon
    Vanilla pouring in to bowl
    Add vanilla
    Mixing ingredients together in bowl
    Mix ingredients together
    1. Pour egg mixture over the top of the cinnamon rolls in the dish.
    fully mixed batter in bowl
    Ready for pouring
    Pouring batter over cinnamon rolls
    Pour batter over rolls
    1. Drizzle the maple syrup all over the top.
    Pouring syrup over rolls
    Pour syrup over rolls
    1. Place in your preheated oven and bake for 20-30 minutes (see tips below for your desired baking time), until the top is golden brown, and let cool for a few minutes.
    baked cinnamon roll casserole
    Fresh from the oven
    1. Remove the metal lid from the icing container and microwave the icing for 5-10 seconds, until it's thin enough to drizzle. Then, pour the icing all over the top of the casserole!
    Pouring icing over cinnamon rolls
    Pour icing on top
    icing all over top of cinnamon rolls
    Icing on top

    How Long to Bake Cinnamon Roll Casserole

    If you see the photos below, the first image of the cinnamon roll casserole is baked for 20 minutes at 375°. This is a more gooey, soft, doughy center, that some prefer. For instance, if you love a gooey cinnamon roll… then you may prefer 20 minutes.

    The second image is the cinnamon roll casserole baked for 25-30 minutes, giving the casserole more of a “cooked” fluffy center that others may prefer.

    cinnamon roll casserole on spatula
    Baked for 20 minutes
    Cinnamon roll casserole on spatula
    Baked for 25-30 minutes
    1. When the casserole is baked to your desired level, sprinkle powdered sugar on top, if desired and enjoy!
    Powdered sugar on top of casserole
    Sprinkle powdered sugar

    Keep in mind, this delicious breakfast casserole is best served as a warm casserole, with a little extra syrup and powdered sugar.

    Cinnamon roll casserole bite on fork

    FAQs

    Can I double this cinnamon roll casserole recipe?

    Absolutely! Just double the ingredients and use an 8×11 baking pan or casserole dish. Cooking time should still be the same, but keep in mind how gooey you want the center. See notes in post for different bake time.

    What about a 9×13 pan? Although this pan size may be more common in your home, it may work ok but I haven’t tried this. I caution against it because there’s a lot of space left between the cinnamon roll pieces and this allows the egg/cream mixture to sit, and could be sections of a scrambled egg texture.

    Can I make cinnamon roll casserole in advance?

    This casserole can all be put together the night before, covered and stored in the refrigerator, and then baked the next morning. The baking temperature stays the same but since the casserole will be really cold from refrigeration, you may want to leave it to sit out on the counter for 30 minutes or so before baking may keep the baking time but not necessary.

    How do you store this sweet breakfast casserole?

    If you happen to have leftovers of this cinnamon roll breakfast bake, store in an airtight container or allow casserole to come to room temperature and place plastic wrap on top of baking dish and place in the refrigerator. For best results, enjoy the next morning or within 5 days.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    Now although I’ve called this a cinnamon roll casserole, this could easily be called a cinnamon roll french toast casserole because of the eggs and maple syrup drizzle… so call it whatever you like, and whatever tickles your fancy!

    If you love this easy breakfast casserole recipe, then you’ll adore these other breakfast recipes, such as these pancakes in the oven, this French Toast Bake, and this Easy, Fluffy Pancake Recipe.

    Then of course, if you’d like to browse ALL of the easy breakfast recipes, especially mini cinnamon rolls, you’re sure to find more to add to your weekend favorites for the perfect breakfast or for even a holiday brunch!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    slice of cinnamon roll casserole on plate
    Print Pin
    4.71 from 87 votes

    Cinnamon Roll Casserole

    An easy Cinnamon Roll Casserole that's perfect for breakfast, made of cinnamon roll pieces, butter, cinnamon, vanilla, heavy cream, syrup and eggs!
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 382kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 12.4 ounces can Pillsbury Original Icing Cinnamon Rolls
    • 3 large eggs
    • ¼ cup heavy cream
    • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ cup maple syrup
    • powdered sugar if desired

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 375 degrees and lightly spray an 8×8 baking pan with non-stick cooking spray.
    • Break cinnamon rolls apart in to small pieces and place in greased baking dish.
    • Melt the butter and pour it on top of cinnamon rolls.
    • In a medium bowl, beat together the eggs, heavy cream, cinnamon and vanilla until well combined. Pour over the top of the cinnamon rolls in the dish. 
    • Drizzle the maple syrup all over the top. 
    • Bake for 20-25 minutes, until top is golden brown. Cool for a few minutes. (See notes in post for specific baking times for desired texture.)
    • Remove the metal lid from the icing container and microwave the icing for 5-10 seconds, until it's thin enough to drizzle. 
    • Pour the icing all over the top. Best served warm with a little extra syrup and powdered sugar. 

    Video

    Notes

    Making cinnamon roll casserole in advance:
    This casserole can all be put together the night before, covered and stored in the refrigerator, and then baked the next morning. The baking temperature stays the same but since the casserole will be really cold from refrigeration, you may want to leave it to sit out on the counter for 30 minutes or so before baking may keep the baking time but not necessary.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 382kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 114mg | Sodium: 462mg | Potassium: 108mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 54mg | Iron: 1mg

    Sugar Cookie Fudge

    December 22, 2024

    Close up photo of stacked squares of white chocolate fudge topped with red, green and white sprinkles

    Sugar Cookie Fudge: This super smooth, no-bake white chocolate fudge tastes like a classic Christmas sugar cookie and is topped with festive, Christmas sprinkles!

    A white plate holding pieces of white fudge topped with red, white and green sprinkles is in the center of the photo

    You guys! Christmas time is just my favorite. And this type of holiday dessert recipe makes me so happy. It combines two of my very favorite things: sugar cookies and cookie dough fudge! It tastes like sugar cookie dough but I don’t have to heat up my oven. This sugar cookie fudge recipe will be on repeat all holiday season long.

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    Let’s all say it together: no bake! This no-bake sugar cookie Christmas fudge is made with one saucepan and one baking sheet and just needs to chill in the fridge. It doesn’t get much easier than that. We love it as much as this no bake candy cane pie or these no-bake cornflake cookies!

    Easy recipes like this one are perfect for edible gift giving and squares of creamy fudge make a great addition to those Christmas cookie trays.

    Just by changing the colors of the festive sprinkles you add to the top of the fudge, you can make this fudge for any holiday. Red and pink sprinkles for Valentine’s Day, green jimmies for St. Patrick’s Day, pastel eggs and bunnies for Easter … there are so many holiday options!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    A quick trip to the grocery store will provide all of the simple ingredients for this cookie fudge recipe.

    Bowls of ingredients to make Christmas cookie fudge are displayed on a white marble background
    • 12 tablespoons of unsalted butter
    • 1 cup of sugar cookie mix, sifted
    • ¾ cup evaporated milk
    • 3 cups granulated sugar
    • 11 oz. white chocolate chips (one bag)
    • 7 oz. marshmallow fluff (one jar)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 3 tablespoons holiday sprinkles

    See the printable recipe card for this Christmas fudge recipe below with ingredients, nutrition information, and detailed recipe notes.

    How to Make Sugar Cookie Fudge

    If you can stir and pour, you are already qualified to make this white chocolate cookie fudge. But, we’ve still got detailed instructions and step-by-step photos below to walk you through this easy fudge recipe.

    1. First, line a 9×13 baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
    2. Next, melt the butter in a large saucepan over low heat.
    A saucepan holds pats of unmelted butter while bowls of sugar cookie mix and evaporated milk and a whisk surround the pan
    Melt the butter
    A saucepan contains melted butter and bowls of sugar and evaporated milk wait to be added
    Whisk in the cookie mix and milk
    1. To the melted butter, add the sifted sugar cookie mix and whisk it until it is completely blended.
    2. Now, add the evaporated milk and continue to whisk and cook over medium heat until the mixture is hot.
    3. Then, add the granulated sugar and continue to whisk and cook over medium-high heat for about 5-7 minutes until the mixture comes to a rolling boil.
    4. Add the white chocolate chips and stir until the chips have melted and incorporated into the mixture in the saucepan.
    A saucepan is shown that contains a butter and sugar cookie mixture while a whisk and bowls of other ingredients surround the pan
    Add granulated sugar
    A saucepan is shown with a melted white chocolate mixture surrounded by various recipe ingredients
    Mix in the white chocolate chips
    1. Now, add the marshmallow fluff and vanilla extract. Continue to whisk until all of the ingredients are melted and blended and the mixture is smooth.
    2. Pour the white chocolate fudge into the prepared baking sheet.
    Marshmallow fluff has been added to a saucepan filled with a white chocolate fudge mixture
    Stir in the marshmallow fluff & vanilla
    A 9x13 pan is filled with smooth white fudge
    Pour into the prepared pan
    1. Sprinkle the holiday sprinkles evenly over the top of the fudge.
    A 9x13 pan is filled with white chocolate fudge topped with red, white and green sprinkles
    Add sprinkles!
    1. Refrigerate the fudge for 2 hours or up to overnight. Once the fudge has hardened completely, use a sharp knife to cut it into about 40 bite-sized pieces. Serve by itself or on a Christmas dessert board, and enjoy!
    A birdseye photo of a white plate holding three pieces of white fudge topped with red white and green sprinkles

    Variations

    We have come up with a few different ways that you can make this white chocolate fudge even a little more festive!

    • Add ½ cup of crumbled baked sugar cookies to really amp up the sugar cookie flavor of this holiday fudge recipe.
    • Use a cookie cutter to cut festive shapes from the set fudge. (Bonus: You can nibble on all of the pieces left over after cutting!)
    • Choose your favorite sprinkles! We used nonpareils but you can add jimmies (those long skinny sprinkles) or the fancy holiday shaped sprinkles like trees, santa faces, wreaths, etc.
    • Change the flavor of the cookie mix. I think a snickerdoodle or gingerbread cookie mix would be absolutely delicious for the holidays!
    A white plate holding pieces of white fudge topped with red, white and green sprinkles is in the center of the photo and another plate of fudge and a milk bottle are in the background

    Storage

    To store this Christmas cookie fudge in the refrigerator, layer it between pieces of wax paper and place it in an airtight container.

    To freeze this fudge, wrap it in a layer of waxed paper, then in a layer of plastic wrap or aluminum foil. Store the wrapped fudge in a freezer bag for up to 3 months. When you are ready to eat it, allow it to thaw for 2-3 hours at room temperature.

    A birdseye photo of several plates holding pieces of white chocolate fudge with red white and green sprinkles

    More No Bake Christmas Desserts

    We have it on good authority that no bake desserts just might keep you on Santa’s nice list! Here are some of the most delicious ways to make that list:

    • Christmas Popcorn Balls (with a free gift tag printable!)
    • Cornflake Wreath Cookies
    • Christmas Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball
    • Christmas Tree Cake Dip
    • Holiday Snack Mix

    Or if you don’t have to have a no bake recipe, you’ll love this melted snowman dessert!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up photo of stacked squares of white chocolate fudge topped with red, green and white sprinkles
    Print Pin
    5 from 7 votes

    Sugar Cookie Fudge

    Sugar Cookie Fudge: This super smooth, no-bake white chocolate fudge tastes like a classic Christmas sugar cookie and is topped with festive, Christmas sprinkles!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Set Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 40 pieces
    Calories 178kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 12 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1 cup sugar cookie mix sifted
    • ¾ cup evaporated milk
    • 3 cups granulated sugar
    • 11 ounces white chocolate chips
    • 7 ounces marshmallow fluff
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • 3 tablespoon holiday sprinkles

    Instructions

    • First, line a 9×13 baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
    • Next, melt the butter in a large saucepan over low heat.
    • To the melted butter, add the sugar cookie mix and whisk it until it is completely blended.
    • Now, add the evaporated milk and continue to whisk and cook over medium heat until the mixture is hot.
    • Then, add the granulated sugar and continue to whisk and cook over medium-high heat for about 5-7 minutes until the mixture comes to a roiling boil.
    • Add the white chocolate chips and stir until the chips have melted and incorporated into the mixture in the saucepan.
    • Now, add the marshmallow fluff and vanilla extract. Continue to whisk until all of the ingredients are melted and blended and the mixture is smooth.
    • Finally, pour the white chocolate fudge into the prepared baking sheet and sprinkle the sprinkles over the top of the fudge.
    • Refrigerate the fudge for 2-4 hours or up to overnight. Once the fudge has hardened completely, use a sharp knife to cut it into about 40 bite sized pieces. Serve and enjoy!

    Video

    Notes

    • Sifting the sugar cookie mix prevents lumps in the fudge.
    • You can use any combination of holiday sprinkles to decorate the top of the fudge.
    • Keep the fudge refrigerated until it is ready to eat. If the fudge gets too warm, it can get sticky.
    • Use a clean, sharp knife to cut the fudge. You may want to wipe it between cuts to keep the edges of the pieces as sharp as possible.
    • To store this sugar cookie fudge in the refrigerator, layer it between pieces of waxed paper in an airtight container.
    • To freeze this fudge, wrap it in a layer of waxed paper, then in a layer of plastic wrap or aluminum foil. Store the wrapped fudge in a ziplock freezer bag. When you are ready to eat it, allow it to thaw for 2-3 hours at room temperature.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1piece | Calories: 178kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 30mg | Potassium: 38mg | Fiber: 0.02g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 119IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Biscoff Cheesecake

    December 22, 2024

    Slice of Biscoff Cheesecake on white plates

    This Biscoff Cheesecake, or Lotus Cheesecake, is a decadent treat, and so easy to make! Using Biscoff cookies as the crust and Biscoff cookie butter in the filling AND the topping, it’s going to be your new favorite cheesecake! Similar to our Biscoff Pie recipe, the flavors come together to make a delicious dessert!

    Biscoff Cheesecake on white plates

    Quick Overview: It’s best to allow the cheesecake to chill overnight, so planning to make this in advance is ideal! (Although chilling at least 5 hours is perfectly fine!) Bake at 350°.

    Why You’re Going to Love This Cheesecake

    • We love all cheesecake recipes but the Biscoff cookie and Biscoff butter, takes it to a whole new level on flavor, and may just become one of your new favorite dessert recipes! (Along with these Biscoff truffles and Biscoff cupcakes of course.)
    • Biscoff cheesecake is an easy cheesecake, so don’t be intimidated by its beautiful presence!
    • It’s perfect for a special occasion or just because you want a sweet treat on the weekend!
    • The crust is made out of Biscoff cookies (kind of like we did with the Oreo cheesecake) and I have a feeling this will be the crust we use for most of our cheesecakes now! You can use any extra cookies to make this
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    I think what I love most about this Biscoff cheesecake recipe though, is that it uses simple ingredients that you can find at almost any grocery store, and you probably even have most of them on hand.

    ingredients for Biscoff Cheesecake

    See the full recipe card at the bottom of this post, for instructions and easy to read printable card, all in one place!

    Biscoff Cookie Crust

    You can use graham crackers to make the crust but it’s HIGHLY recommended to use Biscoff cookies. (In case it’s helpful, I go in to more detail in this Biscoff pie crust recipe.)

    • 8.8-ounce sleeve Biscoff cookies (you can find these at your local supermarket, and they may also be called “lotus Biscoff biscuits” or “Lotus biscuits”) If you have leftovers, consider this Biscoff fudge recipe!
    • ⅓ cup melted butter
    • Pinch salt

    Cheesecake Filling

    • 4 packages cream cheese
    • 1 cup sugar
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ½ cup Biscoff cookie butter spread (you can find this at your local supermarket)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 teaspoon lemon juice, optional
    • 4 large eggs
    • ¼ cup cookie butter, melted

    Biscoff Cookie Butter and Cookie Topping

    • ¼ cup cookie butter, melted
    • Crushed Biscoff cookies

    How to Make Biscoff Cheesecake

    1. Coat the bottom and sides of a 9" springform pan with nonstick cooking spray.
    2. Place one oven rack in the middle of the oven, and another below it. Place a 13×9" baking dish on the lower rack and carefully fill halfway with boiling water, this will create steam in the oven to help prevent cracking. Preheat oven to 350°F.
    Biscoff cookies in food processor
    Place cookies in food processor.
    Crushed cookies in food processor
    Process until fine crumbs.
    1. Place the sleeve of speculoos cookies in the work bowl of a food processor, pulse until all the cookies are pulverized into crumbs.
    Add butter to cookie crumbs
    Add butter to cookie crumbs.
    buttery cookie crumbs in food prcoessor
    Buttery cookie crumbs.
    1. Transfer to a medium bowl, add the melted butter and a pinch of salt, and mix with a fork until combined.
    glass pressing crumbs in to pan for crust
    Use a glass to press crust.
    pressed Biscoff crust in pan
    Pressed cookie crumbs for crust.
    1. Press into the bottom of the springform pan and 1" up the sides using a flat bottom glass. Freeze while you make the filling.

      *No food processor? Place the cookies in a gallon size zip top bag, squeeze the air out, and crush the cookies with a rolling pin or small mallet.
    Ingredients in bowl for cheesecake filling
    Mix ingredients for cheesecake filling.
    Eggs added in to mixture
    Mix in eggs one at a time.
    1. In a large bowl, beat together the cream cheese, sugar, sour cream, ½ cup cookie butter, vanilla, and lemon juice with a hand mixer on medium-low until smooth.

      Add eggs, one at a time, mixing briefly after each addition until combined.

      Do not overmix the cream cheese mixture. This will create air bubbles which can cause the cheesecake to crack.
    Creamy Biscoff cheesecake filling in bowl
    1. Pour half of the cheesecake filling into the springform pan.
    Half of filling poured in to crust
    1. Drizzle the ¼ cup melted lotus biscoff spread onto the filling, swirl lightly with a butter knife.
    Biscoff butter drizzled in cheesecake
    Pour melted Biscoff butter in to cheesecake.
    Swirled Biscoff butter in to cheesecake filling
    Swirl Biscoff butter with knife.
    1. Pour remaining cheesecake filling on top, smooth with a spatula. Pick the pan up and tap it on the counter a few times to encourage any air bubbles to come up tothe surface. Place the cheesecake in the oven on middle rack.
    Remainder of cheesecake on top
    Pour remainder of cheesecake on top.
    1. Bake the Biscoff cheesecake at 350°F for 30 minutes, then reduce temperature to 300°F for 30 minutes, or untilcooked through.

      NOTE: Cheesecake cooking time can vary greatly. Begin checking it at 55 minutes, it can take up to 1 hour 20 minutes to fully cook.

      The cheesecake is done when the outer edge looks dry, firm, lightly brown and starts to pull away from the pan, the center will still be jiggly and shiny.

      Gently cool the cheesecake: Turn the oven off and leave the oven door closed for 30 minutes, do not open the door.

      After 30 minutes, wedge a kitchen towel in the door to prop it open for another 30 minutes.

      Remove the cheesecake and allow it to cool at room temperature for 2 hours, then place in fridge uncovered for at least 5 hours, overnight is best.

    Cooling the Biscoff cheesecake very slowly also helps prevent cracks. It's ok if your cheesecake does crack a bit, the melted cookie butter you drizzle on top will cover it right up

    Baked Biscoff Cheesecake
    1. The following day, or just before serving, release cheesecake from springform pan and place on serving platter. Melt cookie butter in microwave for 20 seconds, and pour or drizzle on top of the entire cheesecake, allowing it to drip down the sides.
    Biscoff Butter poured on to cheesecake
    Pour Biscoff Butter on to Cheesecake.
    Spread Biscoff butter on top of cheesecake
    Spread Biscoff butter on to cheesecake.
    1. Sprinkle the top of the cheesecake with crushed Biscoff cookie crumbs.
    Crushed Biscoff cookies on top of cheesecake
    Pour crushed Biscoff cookies on top.

    Serve a slice of this delicious cheesecake, or store for later. (See tips for storing, below.)

    Biscoff Cheesecake with Drizzle

    How to Store Biscoff Cheesecake

    Store any of this leftover cookie butter cheesecake in the refrigerator, as airtight as possible, for up to 5 days. This could be on a cake plate or stand, etc. covered with plastic wrap. You don’t want the flavors from other food in the refrigerator to change the taste of your cheesecake and you also don’t want the cheesecake to dry out.

    Slice of cheesecake held above cake

    Variations

    • The Biscoff Butter drizzle in the middle of the cheesecake is completely optional, but highly recommended!
    • Love whipped cream? You can also top each slice with whipped cream if that’s your style.
    Slice of cheesecake on plate

    Equipment

    You’ll want to use a springform pan for this cheesecake recipe. If you don’t have one, you can get a 9 inch springform pan here.

    Fork holding bite of Biscoff cheesecake

    Biscoff Cheesecake FAQs

    Can you freeze cheesecake?

    Yes! To freeze the cheesecake, wrap tightly in two layers of plastic wrap, followed by aluminum foil. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight. Then, drizzle with melted cookie butter and crushed cookies when ready to serve.

    What Flavor is Biscoff?

    Biscoff cookies have a caramel flavor. The cookies are crispy and have a light flavor! Biscoff butter is similar in texture to peanut butter but has the taste of Biscoff cookies instead!

    Which cheese is best for cheesecake?

    Definitely cream cheese! Mixed with other ingredients to sweeten it for cheesecake, it’s the perfect texture and sweetness!

    Top Tips

    • Use good quality cream cheese, such as the Philadelphia brand. Bargain brands often contain stabilizers that will affect the texture of your cheesecake.
    • The sour cream and fresh lemon juice add a bit of tang to help cut the sweetness. Lemon juice is optional but highly recommended.
    • Soften cream cheese more quickly by cutting it into tiny chunks and spreading it out on a large sheet pan, leaving at room temp for 30-60 minutes. You can also microwave unwrapped cream cheese in 15 second intervals until soft.
    • If your cheesecake batter looks lumpy, your cream cheese was too cold. It can be fixed! Before adding the eggs, microwave the batter for 15 seconds and mix again. If it's still lumpy, microwave another 15 seconds.
    • To cut the cheesecake cleanly, run a large knife under hot water and wipe dry before each cut.

    More Cake Recipes

    If you loved this Biscoff cheesecake recipe, then you’ll definitely want to check out some of our other favorites:

    • Slice of ugly duckling cake on white plates.
      Ugly Duckling Cake
    • A slice of old-fashioned carrot cake on round, vintage plate.
      Old-Fashioned Carrot Cake Recipe
    • Slice of Strawberry Whipped Cream Cake on round plate, next to a sliced strawberry.
      Strawberry Whipped Cream Cake
    • Pineapple Sunshine Cake
      Pineapple Sunshine Cake

    Recipe

    Slice of Biscoff Cheesecake on white plates
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Biscoff Cheesecake

    This Biscoff Cheesecake, or Lotus Cheesecake, is a decadent treat, and so easy to make! Using Biscoff cookies as the crust and Biscoff cookie butter in the filling AND the topping, it's going to be your new favorite cheesecake!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour
    Cooling Time 8 hours hours
    Total Time 9 hours hours 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 slices
    Calories 624kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 1 9 Inch Springform pan

    Ingredients

    For Biscoff Cookie Crust

    • 8.8 ounce sleeve Biscoff cookies Any speculoos cookies will do
    • ⅓ cup melted butter
    • pinch salt

    Biscoff Cheesecake Filling

    • 4 packages cream cheese 8 ounces each
    • 1 cup sugar
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ½ cup Biscoff cookie butter
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 teaspoons lemon juice optional
    • 4 large eggs
    • ¼ cup Biscoff Cookie Butter melted

    Biscoff Cheesecake Topping

    • ¼ cup Biscoff Cookie Butter melted
    • crushed Biscoff cookies

    Instructions

    • Coat the bottom and sides of a 9" springform pan with nonstick cooking spray.
    • Place one oven rack in the middle of the oven, and another below it. Place a 13×9"baking dish on the lower rack and carefully fill halfway with boiling water, this will create steam in the oven to help prevent cracking. Preheat oven to 350°F.
    • Place the sleeve of speculoos cookies in the work bowl of a food processor, pulse until all the cookies are pulverized into crumbs. Transfer to a medium bowl, add the melted butter and a pinch of salt, mix with a fork until combined. Press into the bottom of the springform pan and 1" up the sides using a flat bottom glass. Freeze while you make thefilling. *No food processor? See notes.
    • In a large bowl, beat together the cream cheese, sugar, sour cream, ½ cup cookiebutter, vanilla, and lemon juice with a hand mixer on medium low until smooth. Add eggs one at a time, mixing briefly after each addition until combined. Do not overmix.
    • Pour half of the cheesecake filling into the springform pan. Drizzle the ¼ cup melted cookie butter onto the filling, swirl lightly with a butter knife. Pour remaining cheesecake filling on top, smooth with a spatula. Pick the pan up and tap it on the counter a few times to encourage any air bubbles to come up tothe surface. Place the cheesecake inthe oven on middle rack.
    • Bake at 350°F for 30 minutes, then reduce temperature to 300°F for 30 minutes, or until cooked through. The cheesecake is done when the outer edge looks dry, firm, lightly brown and starts to pull away from the pan, the center will still be jiggly and shiny.
      Gently cool the cheesecake: Turn the oven off and leave the door closed for 30 minutes, do not open the door. After 30 minutes, wedge a kitchen towel in the door toprop it open for another 30 minutes. Remove the cheesecake and allow it to cool at room temperature for 2 hours, then place in fridge uncovered for at least 5 hours,overnight is best.
    • Just before serving, release cheesecake from springform pan and place on serving platter. Melt cookie butter in microwave for 20 seconds, and pour or drizzle on top of cheesecake, allowing it to drip down the sides. Sprinkle with crushed cookies.

    Notes

    Do not overmix the batter. This will create air bubbles which can cause the cheesecake to crack.
    Cheesecake cooking time can vary greatly. Begin checking it at 55 minutes, it can take up to 1 hour 20 minutes to fully cook.
    To cut the cheesecake cleanly, run a large knife under hot water and wipe dry before each cut.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 624kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 165mg | Sodium: 423mg | Potassium: 158mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 1307IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 1mg

    • « Go to Previous Page
    • Page 1
    • Interim pages omitted …
    • Page 3
    • Page 4
    • Page 5
    • Page 6
    • Page 7
    • Interim pages omitted …
    • Page 25
    • Go to Next Page »

    Primary Sidebar

    Jessica Burgess of Fantabulosity, slicing an avocado.

    Hi, I'm Jessica! - Owner and Creator of the blog and brand, Fantabulosity.

    I’m here to help you make easy comfort food and nostalgic recipes, using simple ingredients, that everyone will love.

    More about me →

    Potluck Recipes

    • A slice of strawberry jello cake, topped with a strawberry slice, sitting on a round plate.
      Strawberry Jello Cake (Easy, Moist Strawberry Cake)
    • Crack green beans on wooden spoon.
      Crack Green Beans
    • Old fashioned potluck cake recipes collage.
      Old-Fashioned Cakes That Still Show Up at Every Potluck
    • Collage of potluck desserts.
      Easy Potluck Desserts (Simple Recipes That Always Get Asked For)
    • Cold Pasta Salad Recipes Collage.
      Cold Pasta Salad Recipes
    • Chicken Casserole recipes image collage.
      20 Chicken Casserole Recipes

    Popular Recipes

    • bread pudding in baking dish
      Bread Pudding Recipe: Easy Old Fashioned Recipe (With Video!)
    • Burger baked in the oven, steamed in aluminum foil, and placed on white plate.
      Burgers in the Oven
    • two tuna salad sandwiches stacked on top of each other
      The BEST Tuna Salad Recipe
    • Sliced banana bread on white platter
      Best Banana Bread
    • Strawberry brownies on white marble cutting board.
      Strawberry Brownies Recipe
    • Cheeseburger Sliders
      Cheeseburger Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    Featured In

    About

    • About Jessica
    • Contact
    • Collaborate
    • Dinner System

    Easy Recipes

    • All Recipes
    • Vintage Recipes
    • Dinner Recipes
    • Desserts

    How to Cook

    • Oven-Baked
    • Stove-Top
    • No Bake
    • Cooking Basics

    Privacy Policy |Accessibility Copyright © 2026 Fantabulosity | Terms & Conditions | FTC
    All recipes, photos, and content are copyrighted and may not be reproduced, republished, or distributed without written permission.

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required